Estimating

FLUOR
ESTIMATING
STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS
This manual is the property of

FLUOR CORPORATION
and is loaned to
It shall be returned to the Aliso Viejo

Standards and Procedures Group on request.
The contents of this manual are confidential,

and shall not be reproduced, destroyed, loaned
nor given away without specific permission.
000 310 0001

April 2000
Page 1 of 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000 310 0001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000 310 0005
INTRODUCTION
000 310 0010
BASIS OF WORK HOUR UNITS
000 310 1000
EARTHWORK
000 310 1100
CONCRETE
000 310 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL
000 310 1300
ARCHITECTURAL
000 310 1400
EQUIPMENT
000 310 1500
PIPING
000 310 1600
ELECTRICAL
000 310 1700
CONTROL SYSTEMS
000 310 1800
PAINT & INSULATION
000 310 2000
DEMOLITION
000 310 3000
CREW MIXES
000 310 9000
FINAL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION
ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL
000 310 0005

April 2000
Page 1 of 1
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
The purpose of this manual is to provide a unit work hour base for the
preparation of construction estimates.
APPLICATION
The unit work hours in this manual represent Fluor Daniel standards. It is the
estimators responsibility to apply his/her knowledge and experience in the
adjustment of these units, to obtain total erection hours.
The Standard Unit Work Hours also provide a consistent base of reference so
that estimators of every sector and office can communicate intelligently and
effectively.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The work hour units in this manual represent the collective efforts of Fluor
Daniel Construction history.
000 310 0010

April 2000
Page 1 of 1
BASIS OF WORK HOUR UNITS

The unit work hours are based from projects located in the United States and Canada.
The unit work hours are neutral with respect to weather and geographic location and must
be adjusted to reflect site-specific conditions.
A grass roots condition (level and dry).
Mild climate (i.e., 40- 85 F).
Project work site to be less than 5,000 feet above sea level.
Seismic zone of 0.
All work areas are free of contamination.
All work to be performed during daylight hours.
Workweek is 40 hours per week (4-10 hour workdays or 5-8 hour workdays).
Maximum height of work limited to 20 feet above floor/grade. Minimum headroom = 80.
Workspace per each worker ranges from 250 to 350 square feet.
Maximum haul distance from storage/laydown area is 1,000 feet.
Brass alley/gate 2000 feet or less from work area.
Engineering deliverables and material deliveries are received according to project schedule.
Skilled craft is available.
Skilled field staff is available.
Construction equipment and small tools are available.
General foreman, operators, and truck drivers that are required for work activities are
included in the unit work hours.
Scaffolding is not included in the unit work hours.
Rework for design errors is not included.
Surveyors are not included.
Show up time is not included in the unit work hours.
Tool and warehouse workers are not included in the unit work hours.
000 310 1000

April 2000
Page 1 of 3
EARTHWORK UNIT WORK HOURS

DESCRIPTION
WHs
UOM
6.0
8.0
10.0
ACRE
ACRE
ACRE
20.0
ACRE
Strip Topsoil 6 depth

Up to 4,000 CY
For additional CYs above 4,000
(Maximum haul on site 500 feet)
0.05
0.03
CY
CY
Scarify and Compact to 6 deep
0.03
SQ.YD.
Cut and Fill (Maximum 500 foot travel/haul)
0.05
CY
Construct Earthfill Dikes
0.3
CY
In Plant Roads base course only

8 aggregate crushed rock
12 sub base select fill
0.015
0.022
SQ.YD.
SQ.YD.
0.15
CY
A. GENERAL SITEWORK
Clear Brush
Light
Medium
Heavy
Clear, Grub and Remove Trees, including stumps
(Based on an average of 100 trees per acre, 8 diameter
or less excludes load, haul and disposal off site)
B. MASS AREA EXCAVATION

C. INDIVIDUAL FOUNDATION EXCAVATION
100% Machine Excavation (Medium soil common earth and loam)

(Excavated material placed next to excavation site. For excess excavated material haul,
see Load, Haul and Dump activity)
Structures
Buildings
Equipment
Pipe Supports
Basins and Pits
Manholes
Reservoirs and Ponds
Trenching
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.3
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
For dirt placed in waiting truck for haul and dump, add 20% to above units.
000 310 1000

April 2000
Page 2 of 3

DESCRIPTION
WHs
UOM
100% Hand Excavation

(Medium soil common earth and loam)
2.5
CY
100% Hand Trenching

2.2
CY
100% Machine Backfill/Compaction

0.6
CY
100% Hand Backfill/Compaction

2.0
CY
Bedding (for pipe)

(Work hour unit is for the placement and
compaction of the bedding. It is a
combination of machine and hand work)
0.4
CY
Finish Grading (for Process Areas includes 100% handwork around

individual equipment foundations)
0.1
SQ.YD.
Fine Grading (for Paving applies to In-plant roads

and parking areas)
0.02
SQ.YD.
Site Finish gravel/stone 6 thick

(Based on gravel being dry, loose
and weighing 100 pounds/CF)
0.05
SQ.YD.
Patch Asphalt (4 thick maximum)
0.8
SQ.YD.
Load, Haul and Dump excess excavation

(1 mile haul maximum)
0.1
CY
C. INDIVIDUAL FOUNDATION EXCAVATION cont.
000 310 1000

April 2000
Page 3 of 3

NOTES
1.
All unit work hours are based on average crew mixes and equipment types and sizes.
For more definitive estimates, refer to Means, Richardson or other recognized estimating publications.
2.
Unit work hours include time for equipment operators, laborers, Foreman and General Foreman.
3.
For medium soil (common earth and loam), use work hour units as shown.
4.
Soil adjustments:
Soil Type:
Multiplier
Light Soil (Sand)

Medium Soil (Common earth and loam)
Heavy or Hard Soil
(Compacted loam/stiff clay)
Hard Pan or Shale
5.
0.8
1.0
1.4
1.6
Swell/Compaction factors:
Soil Type:
Adder:
Light Soil (Sand)

Medium Soil (Common earth and loam)
Heavy or Hard Soil
(Compacted loam/stiff clay)
Hard Pan or Shale
15%
20%
25%
35%
6.
For the cubic yardage of excavation that has a high water content, use a 1.8 multiplier. This allows for
excavated material that falls back into excavated site.
7.
Make appropriate adjustments to base work hour units when soil conditions become more densely filled
with boulder material.
8.
All sitework clearing based on onsite disposal (see various categories for allowable distances).
9.
For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson or other recognized
estimating publications.
000 310 1100

April 2000
Page 1 of 3
CONCRETE UNIT WORK HOURS

DESCRIPTION
FORMWORK
WHs UOM
PLACE & FINISH

WHs UOM
0.35
0.25
0.30
0.50
0.35
0.30
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.25
0.50
0.05
0.45
0.50
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.45
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
0.30
0.45
N/A
1.00
0.30
0.30
2.7
1.5
2.5
4.0
3.7
3.5
3.5
0.5
3.7
2.0
10.0
0.7
1.6
0.6
2.4
4.0
0.9
4.0
1.8
1.5
3.0
2.4
0.6
1.0
3.0
0.6
2.0
0.7
3.0
2.7
3.0
0.6
3.3
7.0
4.5
0.7
2.0
A. FORMWORK/PLACE & FINISH

Area Paving
Blocks Large (over 3 CY)
Blocks Small (3 CY or less)
Catch Basins
Columns
Curb
Curb & Gutter
Electrical Envelope (Duct Bank)
Elevated Beams
Elevated Slabs (Float Finish)
Fireproofing (Steel Beams/Columns)
Grade Beam
Grade Beam Exposed w/ Finish
Horizontal Shell/Pipe Sleeper Footing
Horizontal Shell/Pipe Sleeper Wall/Pier
Manholes
Mass Pours (25+ CY)
Miscellaneous Small Pads
Mud Mats
Octagon Pad
Octagon Pier
Piers
Pile Caps
Pits & Trenches - Bottoms
Pits & Trenches - Walls
Retaining Walls Footings
Retaining Walls Walls
Ring Walls/Curved Structures
Sidewalk 4 to 6 thick
Slab on Grade (Float Finish)
Sono Tubes
Spread Footings
Stairs Formed
Stairs Pan Type
Steam Turbine Pedestal
Tie Beam
Walls Buildings
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
LF
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
CY
000 310 1100

April 2000
Page 2 of 3

DESCRIPTION
FORMWORK
WHs UOM
INSTALL
WHs UOM
2.00
N/A
A. FORMWORK/PLACE & FINISH cont.

Block Outs
Field Fireproofed Joints of
Prefabbed Fireproofed Members
Grout
Styrofoam Perimeter Insulation
Vapor Barrier
SQ.FT.
included
0.50
SQ.FT.
N/A
N/A
20.0
4.0
0.1
0.004
EA
CF
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
WHs
UOM
WHs
UOM
20.0
26.0
32.0
TON
TON
TON
0.010
0.013
0.016
POUND
POUND
POUND
16.0
TON
0.008
POUND
Anchor Bolts
1-1/8 diameter and below (3-0 max length)
1-1/4 through 2 diameter (5-0 max length)
All diameters greater than 2
0.60
1.20
0.04
EA
EA
LB
Angle, Plate and Misc.
0.04
LB
B. EMBEDDED ITEMS
Rebar
Install (Shop Fabricated)
Slabs/Mats/Area Paving/Etc.
Equipment Foundations/Footings/Walls/Etc.
Columns/Piers/Trenches/Elevated/Etc.
Field Fabrication Adder
Wire Mesh (42 pounds per 100 SQ.FT. max weight) 0.005
SQ.FT.
Dowels (For Construction Joints)
0.07
EA
Drill & Epoxy Grout Dowels in Existing Concrete
0.40
EA
Roughing Concrete (Includes Bonding Agent)
0.20
SQ.FT.
Pipe Sleeves
0.04
LB
Water Stop
0.10
LF
000 310 1100

April 2000
Page 3 of 3

NOTES
1.
All work hour units include unload, storage and handling to erection site.
2.
Any requirements for cribbing are not included.
3.
Formwork base unit work hours include fabrication, installation, stripping, oiling and cleaning.
Fabrication based on the use of plywood with lumber backup
Installation includes construction joints, keyways, chamfer strips and expansion joints
4.
All accessory labor is included in formwork and embedded item units.

Formwork accessories include form oil, snap ties, nails, brackets, etc.
Rebar accessories include tie wire, rebar chairs, etc.
5.
Formwork base unit work hours do not include any reuse of forms.
Reusing forms 1 time after original use multiply formwork fabrication work hours by 0.85
Reusing forms 2 times after original use multiply formwork fabrication work hours by 0.75
Reusing forms 3 times after original use multiply formwork fabrication work hours by 0.70
Fabrication portion of total formwork unit work hours is approximately 40% but can vary by type.
6.
Place and finish base unit work hours include a normal float finish. Special finishes will require the addition
of the following work hour units:
WHs UOM
Broom
0.025 SQ.FT.
Steel Trowel
0.03
SQ.FT.
Patch & Rub
0.11
SQ.FT.
7.
Place and finish base unit work hours include normal pour methods. Special pour methods will require the
addition of the following work hour units:
Buggy
Multiply standard units times 3.0
8.
Install base unit work hours for grout includes the three main categories cement, non-shrink and epoxy.
Cement grout is basically cement, sand and water and is typically flowable, requiring formwork.
Non-shrink grout is usually a dry pack type, non-flowable, requiring no formwork.
Epoxy grout is technically non-shrink but is flowable, requiring formwork.
9.
Anchor bolt weights for diameters greater than 2 :

2-1/4 13.519 pounds per LF
3
24.033 pounds per LF
10. For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson or other
recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1200

April 2000
Page 1 of 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL UNIT WORK HOURS

DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
A. STRUCTURES, PIPE RACKS, PLATFORMS,

WALKWAYS, ETC.
Light Steel
0-20 PLF
Medium Steel
21-40 PLF
Heavy Steel
41-60 PLF
Extra-Heavy Steel
61-UP PLF
Vessel Platform Framing
20 PSF
Attached to equipment
(does not include grating or handrail)
Handrails - Angle (2-rail)
w/ Toe Plate
17 PLF
w/o Toe Plate
13 PLF
Handrails - Pipe (2-rail)
w/ Toe Plate
10 PLF
w/o Toe Plate
7 PLF
Handrails - Pipe (3-rail)
w/ Toe Plate
13 PLF
w/o Toe Plate
10 PLF
Ladders
w/ Cage
20 PLF
w/o Cage
11 PLF
Safety Gates
Stairs (Assembled)
132 PLF (Vert)
Checkered Plate, 1/4
11.25 PSF
16.35 PSF
Grating, 1-1/4 x 3/16
9.2 PSF
Trench Grating,
27.3 PSF
18 Wide Cast Iron
WHs
UOM
WHs
UOM
23
19
16
12
30
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
------------0.30
------------SQ.FT.
40
TON
0.34
0.26
LF
LF
0.40
0.28
LF
LF
0.52
0.40
LF
LF
LF
LF
EA
RISER
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
80
80
90
TON
TON
TON
20
20
18
33
12
TON
TON
TON
TON
TON
0.90
0.49
4.0
0.86
0.11
0.15
0.15
0.16
B. BUILDING MISC. STEEL

Bar Joist
Trusses (Pre-fabricated)
Metal Decking
Girts and Sag Rods
16
10
--30
TON
TON
-----TON
------0.02
----
------SQ.FT.
----
C. OTHER MISC. STEEL
40
TON
----
----
000 310 1200

April 2000
Page 2 of 5

NOTES
1.
The structural steel unit work hours are based on shop fabricated steel and field bolted connections. They
include unload, storage and handling to erection site.
2.
For field welded connections, add 15% to the standard unit work hours.
3.
Structure height erection adjustment factors:

0 - 20 foot high - no adjustment
21 - 50 foot high - add 10% to total work hours
51 - 100 foot high - add 15% to total work hours
101 foot high and above - add 20% to total work hours
4.
For shop fireproofed steel, include weight of fireproofing with steel, to calculate total installed weight. For
special handling and protection during erection, add 10% to total erection work hours for this category.
5.
Miscellaneous steel for Shoes, Guides & Hangers; Cable Trays; Instrument Supports and Stands; etc., are
included in their respective accounts.
6.
Anchor bolts and other embedded items are covered in the Concrete account.
7.
Take off handrails, ladders, stairways, grating and checkered plate separately from structural shapes.
8.
Pipe rack steel must be taken off by weight category, separately from steel structures.
9.
For ladder takeoffs, need to add 3 LF for elevation level to be accessed.
10. Take off metal floor deck/roof deck in square feet. Add 10% for waste.
11. Primary and secondary members and bracing in a steel structure are to be a part of the takeoff. If connection
plates, seat angles, and the like are not taken off, an allowance is to be added to the total takeoff weights for
these items as follows:
Light Steel
Medium Steel
Heavy Steel
Extra Heavy Steel
15%
10%
8%
5%
Steel items other than shapes are as follows with their allowance for connections and waste:
Handrails
Ladders
Stairs (assembled)
Checkered Plate
Grating
included
included
included
10%
10%
000 310 1200

April 2000
Page 3 of 5

NOTES cont.
12. All % adds are averages subject to change depending on job conditions and/or information available.
13. The unit of weight used in the charts is the 2,000 pound ton.
14. All WHs/LF shown are based on respective weights per LF and total WHs per ton for individual
categories.
15. Definition of weights:
Light Steel
0-20
Medium Steel
21-40
Heavy Steel
41-60
Extra-Heavy Steel
61 & up
Vessel Platform Framing
Attached to equipment
without grating and handrail
20
with grating and handrail
30
Handrails Angle (2-rail)
with Toe Plate
17
without Toe Plate
13
Handrails Pipe (2-rail)
with Toe Plate
10
without Toe Plate
7
Handrails Pipe (3-rail)
with Toe Plate
13
without Toe Plate
10
Ladders
with Cage
20
without
11
Stairs (assembled excludes landings)
132
Standard stair includes handrail,
checkered plate tread and stringer,
2-6 wide, 38.5 degrees slope,
7-3/4 rise, 9-3/4 run.
(75 PLF X cosec 38.5 degrees) + 10% = 132 PLF.
11.25
16.35
Grating, 1-1/4 X 3/16
9.2
Trench Grating, 18 wide Cast Iron
27.3
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per Square Foot

Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF
Pounds per LF Vertical

000 310 1200

April 2000
Page 4 of 5

NOTES cont.
16. Typical structural steel makeup by category:
Heavy Equipment Structures:
Heavy Steel
Medium Steel
Light Steel
Grating
Stairs
Handrails pipe
Ladders
34%
25%
13%
12%
1%
9%
6%
Average Equipment Structures:

Heavy Steel
Medium Steel
Light Steel
Grating
Stairs
Handrails pipe
Ladders
13%
34%
21%
14%
2%
10%
6%
Service Structures under 35

Medium Steel
Light Steel
Grating
Stairs
Handrails pipe
Ladders
6%
39%
26%
2%
17%
10%
Service Structures over 35

Heavy Steel
Medium Steel
Light Steel
Grating
Stairs
Handrails pipe
Ladders
7%
17%
37%
19%
2%
11%
7%
Vertical Vessel Platforms

Platform Framing
Grating
Handrails pipe
Ladders
32%
28%
16%
24%
Rectangular Platforms
Platform Framing
Grating
Handrails pipe
Ladders
21%
35%
22%
22%
Pipe Racks & T-Supports

Heavy Steel
Medium Steel
Light Steel
14%
45%
41%
Misc. Brackets & Supports

Misc.
100%
Floor Framing (not part of steel structure)

Medium Steel
19%
Light Steel
24%
Grating
47%
Stairs
2%
Handrails pipe
8%
Walkways & Stiles

Light Steel
Grating
Stairs
Handrails pipe
44%
19%
13%
24%
Trusses
Trussed Towers (Flare Structures, etc.)

Heavy Steel
39%
Medium Steel
18%
Light Steel
37%
Checkered Plate
2%
Handrails pipe
1%
Ladders
3%
Medium Steel
Light Steel
30%
70%
000 310 1200

April 2000
Page 5 of 5

NOTES cont.
16. Typical structural steel makeup by category cont. :
Misc. Steel (Sump Covers, etc.)
Medium Steel
Light Steel
Checkered Plate
Handrails pipe
5%
21%
56%
18%
17. For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson or other recognized
000 310 1300

April 2000
Page 1 of 1
ARCHITECTURAL UNIT WORK HOURS

The following publications and companies are available for further estimating information on buildings and
building components:
MEANS BUILDING CONSTRUCTION COST DATA

100 Construction Plaza
P.O. Box 800
Kinston, MA 02364-0800
(800) 334-3509
RICHARDSON ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
1742 S. Fraser Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Mesa, AZ 85214-9103
(602) 497-2062
or other recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 1 of 51
EQUIPMENT UNIT WORK HOURS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.
GENERAL NOTES
B.
TANKS & VESSELS
Page 4
1. STORAGE TANKS
2. PRESSURE VESSELS, COLUMNS & REACTORS
3. TRAYS, PACKING & CATALYST
C.
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
HEAT TRANSFER
4. COOLING TOWERS
Packaged Units
Field Erected
5. HEAT EXCHANGERS
Shell & Tube
Plate & Frame
Spiral
Air Coolers
6. WATER CHILLERS (PACKAGED UNITS)
Reciprocating
Centrifugal
Page 10
Page 12
Page 15
D. BOILERS & HEATERS

7. STEAM BOILERS
Packaged Units
Field Erected
8. FIRED HEATERS
Cabin (Box) Type
Vertical Cylindrical (Can) Type

E.
Page 16
Page 18
COMPRESSORS
9. BLOWERS & FANS
10. COMPRESSORS
Centrifugal
Reciprocating
Packaged Units
Page 20
Page 21
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 2 of 51

TABLE OF CONTENTS cont.
F. PUMPS
11. PUMPS
Page 24
Horizontal Centrifugal
Vertical Centrifugal In-Line
Vertical Turbine
Sump
Vacuum
G. MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT

12. CONVEYORS
Open Belt
Roller
Screw
Bucket Elevator
Page 28
H. OTHER PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

13. AGITATORS
Top Entry
Side Entry
Bottom Entry
14. CENTRIFUGES (CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS)
Batch
High Speed
Conveyor
Bowl
15. CRYSTALIZERS
Batch Vacuum
Mechanical
16. DRYERS
Drum
Rotary
Spray
Tray
17. DUST COLLECTORS
Mechanical
Spray
Cloth Bay
Precipitators
18. EXTRACTORS
Continuous Centrifugal
Page 31
Page 32
Page 34
Page 36
Page 39
Page 41
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 3 of 51

H. OTHER PROCESSING EQUIPMENT cont.
19. FILTERS
Plate & Frame
Pressure Leaf
Rotary
Sewage
Sparkler
Vibrating Screens
Flotation
20. MIXERS
Propeller
Blender
Batch
21. SIZE REDUCTION
Crushers
Mills
Cutters
22. THICKENERS
Continuous Type
Page 42
Page 46
Page 48
Page 51
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 4 of 51

A. GENERAL NOTES
1.
Be sure to define mechanical completion.
2.
Work hours do not include maintenance required during storage, prior to erection. Typically this is
included in the Construction Indirects account, however some special cases may require direct
work hours. If so, consult with a Fluor Daniel Construction representative.
3.
Grout work hours not included. Must be added to the appropriate Concrete account.
4.
Sole plates not included. Must be added to the appropriate Concrete account (Embeds).
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 5 of 51

B. TANKS & VESSELS
1. STORAGE TANKS (SHOP FABRICATED)
CAPACITY
IN GALLONS
100
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
3,500
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
11,000
12,000
13,000
14,000
15,000
16,000
17,000
18,000
19,000
20,000
UNLINED
10
25
40
50
60
65
75
80
85
95
105
115
125
130
140
150
160
170
185
200
220
240
260
280
300
JACKETED
15
40
60
75
85
100
110
120
130
145
160
175
185
200
210
225
240
260
280
300
330
360
390
420
450
GLASS
LINED
25
55
80
100
115
130
145
160
170
190
210
230
250
265
280
300
320
340
370
400
440
480
520
560
600
BURIED
10
15
20
20
25
30
30
30
35
40
40
45
45
50
50
60
60
70
70
90
90
90
115
115
115
STORAGE TANK NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Work hour units include receiving, unloading shop fabricated sections of sizes within
shipping limits, retrieval, hauling, rigging to position, shimming to elevation, leveling and
aligning.
Work hour units include field-engineering time to establish centerlines and bench marks.
Work hour units for Unlined category are based on fixed cone roofs. For floating roofs
add 25%.
Work hour units for Glass Lined category include holiday testing.
Work hour units for Buried category do not include excavation, backfill or concrete work
as required.
Work hour units do not include installation of foundation or anchoring system, support
steel, piping, instrumentation or their connections.
Field fabricated tanks are typically a subcontracted item.
For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Page, Richardson or
other recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 6 of 51

B. TANKS & VESSELS cont.
2. PRESSURE VESSELS, COLUMNS & REACTORS
WEIGHT
IN TONS
1 and below
2
3
4
5
10
15
20
30
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
450
HORIZONTAL
35
55
65
80
90
135
170
200
255
340
430
510
580
645
705
760
865
960
1,050
1,135
1,215
VERTICAL
40
60
80
90
105
155
200
235
300
405
510
605
690
770
840
910
1,035
1,155
1,260
1,365
1,460
PRESSURE VESSEL, COLUMN & REACTOR NOTES

1.
Work hour units include receiving, unloading, retrieval, hauling, rigging to position,
shimming to elevation, leveling and aligning.
2. Work hour units include field-engineering time to establish centerlines and bench marks.
3. Work hour units include time for opening manways and clean out.
4. Work hour units are based on reasonable access to erection site. If erection is to be in a
congested area, this should be evaluated separately and the work hours adjusted.
5. Erection and dismantling time must be added for gin poles, if required.
6. Work hour units do not include installation of foundation or anchoring system, support
steel, piping, instrumentation or their connections.
7. Work hour units do not include erection of ladders or platforms.
8. Work hour units do not include field installation of trays, internals, packing or inspection.
9. Work hour units do not include crane set-up and removal time. Typically this is included
in the Construction Indirects account, however some special cases may require direct work
hours. If so, consult with a Fluor Daniel Construction representative.
10. For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Page, Richardson or
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 7 of 51

3. TRAYS, PACKING & CATALYST
TRAYS WHs/EA
DIAMETER
3-0
36
3-6
42
4-0
48
4-6
54
5-0
60
5-6
66
6-0
72
6-6
78
7-0
84
7-6
90
8-0
96
8-6
102
9-0
108
9-6
114
10-0 120
10-6 126
11-0 132
11-6 138
12-0 144
12-6 150
13-0 156
13-6 162
14-0 168
14-6 174
15-0 180
15-6 186
16-0 192
16-6 198
17-0 204
17-6 210
SIEVE
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
20
21
23
24
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
42
44
47
49
53
SINGLE
OR
DOUBLE
DOWNFLOW
VALVE
OR
PERFORATED
6
8
10
12
15
17
19
22
25
28
30
33
37
40
43
47
50
54
57
61
64
68
71
75
78
82
85
89
92
96
SINGLE
OR
DOUBLE
DOWNFLOW
BUBBLE
CAP
8
11
13
16
19
22
25
28
32
36
39
43
48
53
56
61
65
69
74
79
82
87
91
95
100
105
108
113
117
121
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 8 of 51

3. TRAYS, PACKING & CATALYST cont.
TRAYS WHs/EA cont.
DIAMETER
18-0 216
18-6 222
19-0 228
19-6 234
20-0 240
20-6 246
21-0 252
21-6 258
22-0 264
22-6 270
23-0 276
23-6 282
24-0 288
24-6 294
25-0 300
25-6 306
26-0 312
26-6 318
27-0 324
27-6 330
28-0 336
28-6 342
29-0 348
29-6 354
SIEVE
55
58
61
64
67
70
73
77
80
84
87
91
95
98
102
106
110
114
119
123
127
132
136
141
SINGLE
OR
DOUBLE
DOWNFLOW
VALVE
OR
PERFORATED
99
103
106
110
113
117
120
124
127
131
134
138
141
145
148
152
155
159
162
166
169
173
176
180
PACKING
Pall Rings, Raschig Rings, Intalox Saddles, etc.
Metallic Ball Type
Ceramic Ball Type
CATALYST
SINGLE
OR
DOUBLE
DOWNFLOW
BUBBLE
CAP
126
131
134
139
143
147
152
157
160
165
169
173
178
183
186
191
195
199
204
209
212
217
221
225
WHs/CF
0.35
0.50
0.60
WHs/CF
All types
0.40
(Does not include temporary catalyst loading equipment setup.)
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 9 of 51

3. TRAYS, PACKING & CATALYST cont.
TRAYS, PACKING & CATALYST NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Work hour units include receiving, unloading, retrieval, hauling, rigging, picking, setting,
fastening and aligning of trays passed through manway.
Work hour units include an allowance for installation of seal pan under bottom tray.
Work hour units do not include installation of vessel or other internals.
Work hour units do not include time for opening manways and clean out. On new vessels,
this time is included in the erection hours. On existing vessels, work hours must be added
to cover these activities.
Work hour units do not include installation of scrubber or mist eliminator trayed sections.
Hours for these applications should be calculated on a crew basis.
For tray adjustment, leveling and checking in the field, including tightening bolts and nuts,
lost bolt replacement, etc., with the vessel erected, add the following:
Type
Sieve Trays
Valve Trays
Bubble Cap Trays
WHs/SF
0.08
0.12
0.14
Where SF = tray area in square feet

7.
For field inspection of factory assembled trays, add the following:

Diameter
Up to 10
> 10 up to 21
> 21
WHs/Tray
4
7
10
Plus 15 WHs each vessel for opening, purging, air supply and closing.
Hours for inspection include ease of access and required lighting.
8.
Catalyst loading is a critical activity that varies by process systems and by licensors.
Clients typically handle this themselves but may delegate it to Fluor Daniel. When it
becomes a part of our scope of work, consult with Process Engineering about any specific
licensor requirements.
9.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 10 of 51

C. HEAT TRANSFER
4. COOLING TOWERS
PACKAGED UNITS (see note 3)
COOLING
CAPACITY
IN TONS
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
325
350
400
425
450
500
WHs/EA
30
35
40
45
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
FIELD ERECTED (see notes 4 and 8)

GALLONS
PER
MINUTE (GPM)
10,000 to 19,999
20,000 to 29,999
30,000 to 49,999
50,000 to 69,999
70,000 to 89,999
90,000 and above
WHs/EA
1,500
2,800
4,500
7,200
9,600
12,000
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 11 of 51

C. HEAT TRANSFER cont.
4. COOLING TOWERS cont.
COOLING TOWER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Work hour units include receiving, unloading, retrieval, hauling, assembling, erecting,
aligning and anchoring.
Work hours for Packaged Units include erection of prefabricated sections, shipped
knocked-down, of sizes within shipping limits, inclusive of steel or fiberglass
construction, fans, fan motors, controls, fill material, ladders and platforms, as required for
a complete package.
Work hours for Field Erected include wood, steel or fiberglass frame, corrugated casing,
grillage, fiberglass fan stacks, fiberglass fans, fan motors, controls, polyvinylchloride
(PVC) plastic fill and stairs or ladders, as required for a complete assembly.
Caution should be used when estimating field erection in this category. These work
hours are not for detailed estimating but are instead provided as a general guideline and
an aid for scheduling purposes. For a detailed estimate, specific components, materials
of construction and process requirements must be identified and labored accordingly.
See note 9 for other sources.
Work hour units do not include installation of concrete basin, support steel, piping,
instrumentation, electrical power wiring or their connections.
Work hour units do not include installation of circulating water pumps.
Work hour units do not include installation of water treatment system.
Field erected cooling towers are typically a subcontracted item.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 12 of 51

5. HEAT EXCHANGERS
SHELL & TUBE
SQUARE FEET
OF BARE TUBE
SURFACE AREA
Up to 150
151 to 400
401 to 650
651 to 900
901 to 1,150
1,151 to 1,400
1,401 to 1,650
1,651 to 1,900
1,901 to 2,150
2,151 to 2,400
2,401 to 2,650
2,651 to 2,900
2,901 to 3,500
3,501 to 4,000
4,001 to 5,000
5,001 to 7,500
7,501 to 10,000
10,001 to 20,000
20,001 to 30,000
30,001 to 40,000
40,001 to 50,000
50,001 to 75,000
75,001 to 100,000
WHs
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
85
95
110
135
160
210
255
295
330
360
385
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 13 of 51

5. HEAT EXCHANGERS cont.
PLATE & FRAME
SQUARE FEET
OF BARE TUBE
SURFACE AREA
Up to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
151 to 250
251 to 400
401 to 800
801 to 1,500
1,501 to 2,500
2,501 to 4,000
4,001 to 5,000
5,001 to 6,000
6,001 to 7,000
7,001 to 8,000
8,001 to 9,000
9,001 to 10,000
10,001 to 11,000
11,001 to 12,000
WHs
20
30
40
55
65
80
95
105
120
130
135
145
150
160
165
170
180
SPIRAL
SQUARE FEET
OF BARE TUBE
SURFACE AREA
Up to 100
101 to 150
151 to 200
201 to 400
401 to 600
601 to 800
801 to 1,000
1,001 to 1,500
1,501 to 2,000
2,001 to 3,000
3,001 to 4,000
WHs
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
115
135
150
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 14 of 51

5. HEAT EXCHANGERS cont.
AIR COOLED
SQUARE FEET
OF BARE TUBE
SURFACE AREA
1,000 to 2,000
2,001 to 4,000
4,001 to 7,000
7,001 to 10,000
10,001 to 20,000
20,001 to 30,000
30,001 to 40,000
40,001 to 50,000
50,001 to 60,000
60,001 to 70,000
70,001 to 80,000
80,001 to 90,000
90,001 to 100,000
WHs
230
350
540
720
1,080
1,500
1,800
2,280
2,600
2,900
3,200
3,400
3,600
HEAT EXCHANGER NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
shimming to elevation, leveling, aligning and checking out of exchanger as required.
Work hour units in all categories are based on complete shop assembly. If field assembly
is required, work hours should be calculated on a crew basis.
Maximum range given for square feet of bare tube surface area within each category is
based on industry standards.
Work hours for Air Cooled Exchangers include shop-fabricated platforms and walkways
for access to manifolds and motors.
For Air Cooled Exchangers motor, gear and fan field installation, use 50 WH per fan
motor.
For Double Pipe or Hairpin Exchanger, use Shell & Tube work hours.
steel, piping, instrumentation, electrical power wiring or their connections.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 15 of 51

6. WATER CHILLERS (PACKAGED UNITS)
RECIPROCATING TYPE WITH AIR OR WATER COOLED CONDENSERS
COOLING
CAPACITY
IN TONS
5
10
25
50
75
100
150
200
250
WHs/EA
20
25
30
35
40
50
65
75
110
CENTRIFUGAL TYPE WITH WATER COOLED CONDENSERS

COOLING
CAPACITY
IN TONS
Up to 200
> 200 to 500
> 500 to 800
> 800 to 1,000
WHs/EA
60
70
80
90
WATER CHILLER NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Work hour units include receiving, unloading, retrieval, hauling, rigging to position, shimming to
elevation, leveling, aligning, lubricating, bumping for rotation check and installing guards.
Work hour units do not include installation of foundation or anchoring system, support steel,
piping, instrumentation, electrical power wiring or their connections.
Work hour units do not include installation of chilled water/condenser water pumps.
For any activities required which are not included in this section, see Page, Richardson or other
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 16 of 51

D. BOILERS & HEATERS
7. STEAM BOILERS
PACKAGED UNITS (see note 4)
CAPACITY
POUNDS
OF STEAM
PER HOUR
30,000
35,000
40,000
45,000
50,000
60,000
75,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
115,000
125,000
135,000
150,000
175,000
200,000
225,000
SHIPPING
WT.LBS.
59,300
63,800
67,500
75,800
82,700
89,500
96,400
109,600
115,400
121,300
132,000
138,500
149,200
150,500
152,300
157,400
165,500
167,600
WHs
250
260
270
275
280
300
315
350
395
430
435
465
505
555
610
660
700
735
FIELD ERECTED (see notes 5 and 7)

CAPACITY
POUNDS
OF STEAM
PER HOUR
60,000
80,000
100,000
200,000
300,000
400,000
500,000
600,000
700,000
WHs
4,800
6,400
8,000
16,000
24,000
32,000
40,000
48,000
56,000
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 17 of 51

D. BOILERS & HEATERS cont.
7. STEAM BOILERS cont.
STEAM BOILER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
shimming to elevation, leveling, aligning and checking out of boiler as required.
Work hour units are based on saturated steam 100 to 1,000 PSIG.
Work hours for Packaged Units include erection of prefabricated skids, of sizes within
shipping limits, inclusive of boiler and trim; burner for either oil, natural gas or
combination of both; windbox; forced draft fan assembly; firing and control system
(electric or pneumatic, single point); flame safety system; stack; feed water pumps;
ladders and platforms; insulation; and refractory, as required for a complete package.
Work hours for Field Erected include boiler pressure components; by-pass system;
waterwall pressure components; downtake system; superheater pressure components;
backpass system; reheater pressure components; economizer pressure components; soot
blowers; inner casing; outer casing and framing; buckstays and trusses; monitor roof;
weather roof; pressurized roof; all ductwork and hoppers; stacks; supports and guides; drip
castings and furnace bottom seals; air preheaters; doors and mounting arrangements;
ladders and platforms; pulverizers and feeders (for coal fired); burners and registers; seal
and aspirating air; stokers; thermocouples; firing and operating controls; fans and drivers;
postweld heat treating; insulation and insulation supports; and refractory, as required for a
complete assembly.
Caution should be used when estimating field erection in this category. These work
hours are not for detailed estimating but are instead provided as a general guideline and
an aid for scheduling purposes. For a detailed estimate, specific components, materials
of construction and process requirements must be identified and labored accordingly.
See note 8 for other sources.
Field erected boilers are typically a subcontracted item.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 18 of 51

8. FIRED HEATERS
CABIN (BOX) TYPE
HEATER DUTY
MM BTUs/HR
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
CS
TUBE
1,800
2,400
2,800
3,300
3,700
4,400
5,000
5,600
6,200
6,700
7,200
7,700
9,800
11,500
13,500
15,000
17,500
20,500
23,000
25,000
27,000
29,000
32,000
ALLOY
TUBE
2,700
3,300
3,800
4,500
5,000
6,000
7,000
7,800
8,600
9,100
9,600
10,500
13,500
16,000
18,500
21,000
25,000
29,000
32,000
35,000
38,000
41,000
44,000
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 19 of 51

8. FIRED HEATERS cont.
VERTICAL CYLINDRICAL (CAN) TYPE
HEATER DUTY
MM BTUs/HR
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
250
300
CS
TUBE
940
1,100
1,250
1,350
1,500
1,650
1,800
1,950
2,100
2,200
2,300
2,450
2,900
3,250
3,550
3,800
ALLOY
TUBE
1,300
1,500
1,700
1,900
2,050
2,250
2,500
2,700
2,850
3,000
3,200
3,300
3,800
-------
FIRED HEATER NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
shimming to elevation, leveling, aligning and checking out of heater as required.
Work hours are applicable for gas, oil or dual-fired type.
Work hours for Fired Heaters include the erection of structural steel frame and casing,
header box, access and observation doors, ladders and platforms, radiant and convection
tubes, crossovers, ductwork and stack, refractory on walls and roof, brick work, burners,
steam/air atomizer, postweld heat treating and insulation, as required for a complete
assembly.
Work hour units do not include induced draft fans w/ drivers, economizers, air preheat
systems, waste heat recovery units or other ancillary equipment.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 20 of 51

E. COMPRESSORS
9. BLOWERS & FANS
HORSE
POWER
1
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
800
1,000
1,250
1,500
2,000
WHs/EA
BLOWERS
FANS
20
20
25
30
35
30
40
35
45
40
55
45
65
50
70
55
80
55
90
60
100
65
120
75
135
80
165
90
190
100
210
105
230
110
260
120
290
130
315
--360
--395
--440
--480
--600
---
BLOWER & FAN NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
shimming to elevation, leveling, aligning, lubricating, bumping for rotation check and
installing guards.
Work hour units do not include installation of ductwork, transition pieces, dampers,
expansion joints or other related ancillary items, which may be purchased and shipped
from the same vendor who supplies the Blower or Fan.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 21 of 51

E. COMPRESSORS cont.
10. COMPRESSORS
CENTRIFUGAL
HP
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
MOTOR
DRIVE
40
55
70
80
90
100
190
220
250
290
320
340
350
380
400
420
440
460
470
480
680
840
1,250
1,400
1,750
2,000
2,300
2,500
2,800
3,000
4,200
5,300
TURBINE
DRIVE
60
90
120
130
150
170
320
370
420
530
610
700
780
910
1,050
1,150
1,250
1,350
1,450
1,500
1,900
2,500
2,800
3,400
3,800
4,200
4,500
4,800
5,200
5,500
-----------
GAS
ENGINE
DRIVE
110
170
220
240
280
320
600
690
780
980
1,200
1,300
1,450
1,750
2,000
2,200
2,400
2,600
2,800
3,000
-------------------------------------------------------------
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 22 of 51

10. COMPRESSORS cont.
RECIPROCATING
HP
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
MOTOR
DRIVE
50
60
80
90
100
120
140
180
210
250
280
320
360
400
450
490
530
570
600
630
710
800
1,000
1,230
2,190
2,650
2,880
3,450
3,680
4,140
6,440
8,000
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 23 of 51

10. COMPRESSORS cont.
PACKAGED UNITS (CENTRIFUGAL OR RECIPROCATING)
HP
Up to 30
> 30 to 100
> 100 to 300
> 300 to 600
> 600 to 1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
3,500
MOTOR
DRIVE
25
50
75
100
125
140
170
210
250
300
COMPRESSOR NOTES
1.
installing guards.
2. Work hour units include field-engineering time to establish centerlines and bench marks.
3. Work hours are applicable for either horizontal or vertical arrangement, as well as
labyrinth, oil, contact or gas seals.
4. Work hours for Centrifugal and Reciprocating Compressors include the installation of
the compressor, base plate, couplings and driver.
5. Work hours for Turbine Drives are applicable for either steam or gas.
6. Work hours for Packaged Units include erection of prefabricated skids, of sizes within
shipping limits, inclusive of the compressor, driver, control panels, lube oil system, oil
coolers, intercoolers, aftercoolers, etc., as required for a complete package.
7. Typically, 3,500 HP and below compressors can be delivered as a pre-assembled skid.
Larger compressors would have to be delivered in multiple pieces, of sizes within
shipping limits.
9. Work hour units do not include installation of vendor furnished interconnecting piping, oil
coolers, lube oil console, auxiliary pumps, filters, gear box, intercoolers, aftercoolers,
intakes, mechanical silencers, acoustical barriers or other related ancillary items, which
may be purchased and shipped from the same vendor who supplies the Compressor.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 24 of 51

F. PUMPS
11. PUMPS
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL
HP
Up to 10
15
25
30
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
500
800
1,000
1,250
1,750
2,000
2,500
3,000
5,000
MOTOR
DRIVE
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
110
120
180
200
230
320
370
430
580
640
730
940
1,290
VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL IN-LINE
HP
Up to 15
> 15 to 30
> 30 to 50
> 50 to 75
> 75 to 100
> 100 to 125
MOTOR
DRIVE
45
75
100
130
150
190
STEAM
TURBINE
DRIVE
--------------------140
160
230
260
300
430
490
560
770
840
950
1,230
1,680
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 25 of 51

F. PUMPS cont.
11. PUMPS cont.
VERTICAL CENTRIFUGAL TURBINE
HP
Up to 10
15
25
30
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
500
800
1,000
1,250
1,750
2,000
2,500
3,000
5,000
MOTOR
DRIVE
30
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
100
110
130
140
220
240
260
300
330
360
400
450
490
520
600
HP
Up to 15
> 15 to 30
> 30 to 50
> 50 to 75
MOTOR
DRIVE
70
110
150
200
SUMP
VACUUM
HP
Up to 3
> 3 to 30
MOTOR
DRIVE
20
30
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 26 of 51

F. PUMPS cont.
11. PUMPS cont.
PUMP NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
installing guards.
Work hours are applicable for single stage and two stage. For multi-stage horizontal
centrifugal pumps, add 10%.
Work hours are for pump and driver assembled on a common base.
Centrifugal pumps can be split into two main types in process plant service: volute
pumps and turbine pumps. The former are more common (the volute, which is also called
the diffuser, is shaped like a cone. It widens out and converts the velocity imparted to the
liquid by the impeller, to feet of head). Turbine pumps have improved through the
development of the innovative variable vane design that requires fewer moving parts.
Positive displacement pumps can be divided into two major categories: reciprocating
and rotating. Reciprocating positive displacement pumps incorporate a plunger or piston
that displaces, or feeds forward, a given volume of fluid per stroke. These can be
identified in two basic classes: Dynamic pumps impart energy to the liquid in a steady
fashion; Displacement pumps impart energy to the liquid in a pulsating fashion. Metering
pumps are a subgroup of the positive displacement type and should be considered as
precision instruments used to feed accurately a predetermined volume of liquid into a
process or system. Rotary pumps consist of two meshing gears, where fluid is carried
between the gear teeth and displaced when they mesh.
Work hours for Vacuum pumps are based on individual rotary piston, oil-sealed, singlestage mechanical type, the unit most commonly used for high-vacuum work (sometimes
called a cam and piston pump).
API pumps differ from ANSI pumps in the following respects:
API pumps have greater corrosion allowances
API pumps have higher permissible nozzle loads
API pumps have more available stuffing box space
API pumps are furnished with wear rings; not always supplied with ANSI pumps
API pumps are centerline-mounted; ANSI pumps are often foot mounted
API pump bearing housings are generally fitted with higher load capacity
bearings and higher life expectancy end seals
For vibration isolators, add the following:
HP up to 50
10%
HP > 50
15%
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 27 of 51

F. PUMPS cont.
11. PUMPS cont.
PUMP NOTES cont.
10. For pump refurbishment of impeller, motor, base plate, bearing or seal, use the following
guidelines:
Based on new pump installation WH chart by driver HP
Impeller removal and cleaning impeller casing - 25%
Reinstall the impeller 20%
Pump realignment 60%
Coupling bolt-up, lubrication and test 15%
Motor - remove
15%
- reinstall
25%
Base plate modifications
- remove
6%
- reinstall
6%
Bearings
- remove
6%
- reinstall
6%
Seal
- remove
20%
- reinstall
25%
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 28 of 51

G. MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
12. CONVEYORS
OPEN BELT (see notes 3, 4, 5, 6 and 12)
WIDTH
IN INCHES
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
WHs PER FOOT OF LENGTH

LIGHT1
HEAVY2
1.5
1.6
2.0
2.5
2.4
3.5
2.9
4.5
3.3
5.6
3.6
6.6
4.0
7.7
4.3
8.9
4.7
10.0
MATERIAL WEIGHT:
LIGHT1 60 pounds per cubic foot or less
HEAVY2 over 60 pounds per cubic foot
ROLLER (see notes 7, 8 and 9)
WIDTH
IN INCHES
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
WHs PER FOOT OF LENGTH

GRAVITY
POWERED
1.0
1.5
1.3
2.0
1.6
2.4
2.4
2.9
2.6
3.3
2.8
3.6
3.0
4.0
3.2
4.3
3.4
4.7
SCREW (see notes 10, 11 and 12)

DIAMETER
IN INCHES
6
9
12
14
16
18
20
24
WHs PER
FOOT OF LENGTH
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 29 of 51

G. MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT cont.
12. CONVEYORS cont.
BUCKET ELEVATORS (SPACED AND CONTINUOUS) (see notes 13 and 14)
LENGTH
IN FEET
Up to 25
26 to 30
31 to 40
41 to 70
71 to 100
WHs PER
FOOT OF LENGTH
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
CONVEYOR NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
installing guards.
Work hours for Open Belt Conveyors include the installation of A frames, truss
sections with appropriate idlers, head pulley and drive, tail pulley (fixed or screw take-up),
horizontal or vertical gravity take-up, snub and bend pulleys, holdback, belting, belt
splicing, loading hopper and discharge hood, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Open Belt Conveyors do not include the installation of covers or
walkways. If required, add the following:
Metal Conveyor Covers
25%
Metal Conveyor Covers and Walkways
100%
Work hours for walkways include the installation of steel framing, angle handrail and
kneerail, toe plate and wooden walk, along the entire length of the conveyor, as required
for a complete assembly.
Where a walkway is required, a cover must also be installed.
Belt Conveyors that handle coal, ore and stone should not exceed 32.5 feet of vertical lift
per 100 lineal feet of travel. See note 12 for additional information.
For weights of different materials for Belt Conveyors, see Richardson.
Work hours for Roller Conveyors include the installation of H stand supports, frame
sections with bolted cross braces, end plate couplers, rollers and main drive section, as
required for a complete assembly.
Roller Conveyors are ideal for conveying open and uneven bottom objects such as skids,
buckets, drums and cans. They can also be used with flat bottom objects. A minimum of
three rollers should always be under the smallest object being conveyed, so that the object
will not tip over or get caught between rollers.
Roller Conveyors are typically installed in a level, horizontal position, with no noticeable
vertical deflection.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 30 of 51

G. MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT cont.
12. CONVEYORS cont.
CONVEYOR NOTES cont.
10. Work hours for Screw Conveyors include the installation of A frames, conveyor trough
and cover, flanged inlet, discharge spout (with hand slide or rack and pinion gate with flat
slide), hanger bearing assemblies (ball or bobbitted/hard iron), coupling shaft, tail shaft,
inlet bearing (ball or bobbitted), inlet bearing plate seal, trough end plate, flanged feet and
saddles, drive assembly and screw shaft, as required for a complete assembly.
11. Screw Conveyors should not exceed 27 feet of vertical lift per 100 lineal feet of travel.
See note 12 for additional information.
12. Work hours for Belt and Screw Conveyors are applicable to vertical lifts up to 20 feet
per 100 lineal feet of travel. For vertical lifts over 20 feet per 100 lineal feet of travel, add
25%.
13. Work hours for Bucket Elevators include the installation of conveyor drive assembly,
head shaft, tail shaft, chain or belt, all casings (head section, tail section, standard and
filler sections) and buckets, as required for a complete assembly.
14. Bucket Elevators typically do not exceed 100 feet in vertical lifting height. The use of
spaced or continuous buckets as well as the use of belt or chain drive is determined by the
type of material being conveyed and which configuration is best suited to handle the
material.
15. There can be a significant reduction in conveying capacity depending upon the type of
conveying system used and the type of material being conveyed.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 31 of 51

H. OTHER PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
13. AGITATORS (see note 3)
HP
1
3
5
7.5
10
15
25
30
50
60
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
TOP
ENTRY
10
20
25
35
40
50
65
75
100
110
150
170
190
225
255
285
315
340
365
385
SIDE
ENTRY
30
45
55
60
65
75
90
100
120
125
150
160
175
190
205
220
230
245
255
265
BOTTOM
ENTRY
40
65
80
90
105
120
150
165
200
215
265
295
315
355
390
420
450
475
495
520
AGITATOR NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
installing guards.
Work hours for Agitators include the installation of motor driver (Direct drive, Belt drive,
Variable Frequency drive or Gear drive), baseplate, bearings, speed reducer, seals, shaft
and impeller, as required for a complete assembly.
Larger HP with longer shafts may be shipped separately but are considered to be an
assembled unit.
An agitator is defined as a device or an apparatus for stirring or shaking by giving
motion; to move with an irregular, rapid or violent action.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 32 of 51

14. CENTRIFUGES (CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS)
BATCH (see note 3)
DIAMETER
IN INCHES
12 to 18
20
24
30
36
40
42
48
50
54
60
BOTTOM
DRIVEN
30
35
40
50
60
--70
80
--90
---
TOP
SUSPENDED
--50
--80
--120
----170
-----
AUTOMATIC
----150
270
--360
----440
--500
HIGH SPEED (see note 4)

DIAMETER
IN INCHES
4
5
6
10
15
20
TUBULAR
90
150
260
-------
DISC
------175
260
300
CONVEYOR (see note 5)

DIAMETER
IN INCHES
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
RECIPROCATING
280
350
385
440
525
630
-----
SCROLL
335
430
480
565
700
825
930
1,100
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 33 of 51

14. CENTRIFUGES (CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS) cont.
BOWL (see note 6)
DIAMETER
IN INCHES
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
SOLID OR
SCREEN
315
340
400
490
580
660
740
820
CENTRIFUGE NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
installing guards.
Work hours for Batch Centrifuges include the installation of basket and curb housing,
curb housing spray fittings and manifold, rotating spray balls, plow for cake removal,
skimmer, cover, inspection door with safety interlock, suspension system, feed tube, rinse
tube, vent pipe, nitrogen purge connection and driver, as required for a complete
assembly.
Work hours for High Speed Centrifuges include the installation of base, casing, rotors,
discs, cooling coils, seals, cover and driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Conveyor Centrifuges includes the installation of base, casing, hard
surfaced conveyor, solid or screen bowl, cake posts with wear plates, plate dams, gearbox
with safety guards and chutes, rinse type feed tube, backflush system, lube system,
vibration isolators and driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Bowl Centrifuges includes the installation of base, casing, rotors, discs,
spindles, solid or screen bowl, cover, safety guards and driver, as required for a complete
assembly.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 34 of 51

15. CRYSTALIZERS
BATCH VACUUM (see note 3)
CAPACITY
GALLONS
2000 & below
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
WHs
400
410
420
440
470
500
540
MECHANICAL (SCRAPED SURFACE) (see notes 4 and 5)

LENGTH
LF
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
WHs
140
190
235
280
320
355
390
430
460
770
1,040
1,270
1,500
1,700
1,900
2,100
2,300
2,500
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 35 of 51

15. CRYSTALIZERS cont.
CRYSTALIZER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
installing guards.
Work hours for Batch Vacuum Crystalizers include the installation of a cone bottom
agitated tank, steam jet ejectors and direct contact condenser, as required for a complete
assembly.
Work hours for Mechanical Crystalizers include the installation of a 24-inch wide trough
with a semi-circular bottom, a cooling jacket on the outside, a spiral ribbon scraper/mixer
the length of the trough and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Mechanical Crystalizers are manufactured in lengths of 10 to 40 feet. If lengths greater
than 40 are required, the units are stacked one on top of another and the solution cascades
from one level to the next.
For any activities required which are not in this section, see Page, Richardson or other
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 36 of 51

16. DRYERS
DRUM (see note 3)
SURFACE AREA
SQ. FT.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
ATMOSPHERIC
SINGLE
DOUBLE
200
--240
--270
350
280
360
300
390
315
410
330
430
340
440
350
455
360
470
430
530
--570
--600
ROTARY (see note 4)

SURFACE AREA
SQ. FT.
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
2,000
DIRECT
FIRED
200
320
400
500
570
640
740
800
870
940
1,470
CAPACITY
CU. FT.
100
200
300
400
500
600
VACUUM
600
800
940
1,040
1,140
1,200
INDIRECT
FIRED
255
400
540
640
770
870
970
1,070
1,140
1,200
2,000
VACUUM
SINGLE
300
430
520
560
600
670
800
840
870
940
1,140
-----
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 37 of 51

16. DRYERS cont.
SPRAY (see note 5)
EVAPORATION
RATE IN LBS./HR.
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
WHs
800
1,175
1,200
1,275
1,300
1,575
1,650
1,700
1,750
TRAY (see note 6)

TRAY
SQ. FT.
40
60
100
150
200
ATMOSPHERIC
50
55
60
70
75
VACUUM
80
95
110
120
135
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 38 of 51

16. DRYERS cont.
DRYER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
installing guards.
Work hours for Drum Dryers include the installation of the drum(s), frame, applicator
rolls, endboards, main bearings, lubrication system, product removal knives, guide shields,
feed device, vapor hood, dry material conveyor, drive mechanism and motor driver, as
Work hours for Rotary Dryers include the installation of a rotating shell fitted with cast
iron or steel tires, internal lifters, flights or louvers, rollers, roller bearings, support frame,
inlet and outlet connections, with a chain or spur gear ring drive and motor diver, as
Work hours for Spray Dryers include the installation of heater, filter, atomizer, fan,
cyclone and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Tray Dryers include the installation of housing, frame, seals, tray
supports, trays, fan and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 39 of 51

17. DUST COLLECTORS
MECHANICAL (see note 3)
FLOW RATE
CU. FT.
PER MINUTE
1,000 or less
2,500
5,000
10,000
20,000
CYCLONE
35
40
45
50
60
MULTIPLE
CYCLONE
50
55
60
70
80
SPRAY (see note 4)

FLOW RATE
CU. FT.
PER MINUTE
1,000 or less
1,500
2,500
5,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
WASHER
70
80
100
140
200
230
270
CLOTH BAY (see note 5)

FLOW RATE
CU. FT.
PER MINUTE
1,000 or less
1,500
2,500
5,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
BAGHOUSE
90
110
140
200
260
315
360
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 40 of 51

17. DUST COLLECTORS cont.
PRECIPITATORS (see note 6)
FLOW RATE
CU. FT.
PER MINUTE
1,500 or less
2,500
5,000
7,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
CENTRIFUGAL
75
100
150
175
200
260
300
ELECTRICAL
LOW
HIGH
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
50
--80
--150
--200
450
270
500
400
550
500
600
DUST COLLECTOR NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
shimming to elevation, leveling, aligning and checking out of dust collector as required.
Work hours for Mechanical Dust Collectors include the installation of the cyclone
(cylindrical shaped upper section and long tapering conical lower section), dust hopper,
scroll outlet, weather cap and support frame, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Spray Dust Collectors include the installation of the housing section,
spray nozzles, collection hopper and support frame, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Cloth Bay Dust Collectors include the installation of the cylindrical or
rectangular enclosure, consisting of the clean air section, cloth filter tubes or bags section,
dirty air section, shaker or pulse type cleaning system, collection hopper, product inlet and
outlet, and support frame, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Precipitator Dust Collectors include the installation of the shell,
ductwork, fans, motor driver, wires, collection plates, rapper system, thermal insulation,
collection hopper and support structure, as required for a complete assembly.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 41 of 51

18. EXTRACTORS (see note 3)
CAPACITY
GALLONS
PER MINUTE
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
CONTINUOUS
CENTRIFUGAL
220
250
280
320
360
400
450
500
EXTRACTOR NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
installing guards.
Work hours for Extractors include the installation of the bowl (both cylindrical and
conical parts), dewatering plates, axial screw hard surface coated, main bearings,
transmission and main motor with fan, as required for a complete assembly.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 42 of 51

19. FILTERS
PLATE & FRAME (see note 3)
FILTERING AREA
SQ. FEET
75 or less
200
500
750
1,000
1,500
WHs
20
30
40
50
60
70
PRESSURE LEAF (see note 4)

FILTERING AREA
SQ. FEET
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
WHs
75
80
85
90
95
100
120
140
155
170
180
ROTARY (see note 5)

FILTERING AREA
SQ. FEET
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,500
2,000
DRUM
400
500
570
640
670
740
770
800
840
870
1,190
1,400
DISK
550
630
740
840
940
1,070
1,140
1,200
1,270
1,340
1,650
2,000
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 43 of 51

19. FILTERS cont.
SEWAGE (see note 6)
FILTERING AREA
SQ. FEET
100
200
300
400
500
600
WHs
255
290
310
335
350
360
SPARKLER (see note 7)

PLATE DIAMETER
IN INCHES
15 or less
16 through 20
21 through 25
26 through 30
31 through 35
WHs
20
30
40
50
60
VIBRATING SCREENS (see note 8)

SCREEN AREA
SQ. FEET
30 or less
>30 to 50
>50 to 70
>70 to 100
>100 to 120
>120 to 160
>160 to 200
SINGLE
DECK
25
30
35
40
55
60
80
DOUBLE
DECK
28
33
39
44
61
66
88
TRIPLE
DECK
29
35
40
46
63
69
92
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 44 of 51

19. FILTERS cont.
FLOTATION (see note 9)
CAPACITY
CU. FT.
15 or less
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
WHs
30
35
40
45
50
60
65
75
80
90
100
FILTER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
installing guards.
Work hours for Plate & Frame Filters include the installation of the filter press plates
mounted on a skeleton frame, closed or open design, wash or pressure plate with different
channel arrangement, with or without stay bosses, integrated heating or cooling coils,
hydraulic press action and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly. The size and
the number of plates required determine the filtration area.
Work hours for Pressure Leaf Filters include the installation of the vertical or horizontal
tank, individually mounted filter leaves on an internal pipe manifold, leaf spacers, frames,
drainage member, intermediate member, surface member, nozzles, manual or hydraulic
cover lift and support frame, as required for a complete assembly. The filtration area is
determined by the size and number of leaves required.
Work hours for Rotary Filters include the installation of either a multi compartment
cylinder shell with internal filtrate piping, polypropylene filter cloth, feed box with inlet
and drain nozzles (DRUM) or segmented disks with polypropylene filter bags (DISK),
suction valve, rake agitated vat with stiffeners, discharge trough, base plate, bearing
support, rotor and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly. The filtration area is
determined by either the drum capacity or by the size and number of segmented disks.
Work hours for Sewage Filters include the installation of the multi compartment cylinder
shell, internal filtrate piping, polypropylene filter cloth, feed box with inlet and drain
nozzles, suction valve, discharge trough, driver consisting of rotor, drive motor base plate,
worm gear reducer and two pillow block bearings with supports, as required for a
complete assembly. Filtration area is determined by the cylinder capacity.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 45 of 51

19. FILTERS cont.
FILTER NOTES cont.
7.
Work hours for Sparkler Filters include the installation of the vertical tank, horizontally
arranged filter plates, perforated support screens, interlocking cups, center rod, tie rods,
filter media, inlet and outlet nozzles, and support legs, as required for a complete
assembly. The diameter and number of plates determine filtration area.
8. Work hours for Vibrating Screen Filters include the installation of the base mounted
unit, back plate at each deck and between decks, discharge lips, single shaft extension, Vbelt drive with taper-lock hubs, eccentrically bored screen sheave bushings and motor
driver, as required for a complete assembly. The width and length of a single screen
determine filtration area. For suspended mounted units, add 25% to the appropriate unit
WHs.
9. Work hours for Flotation Filters include the installation of the eductor shell, disperser,
coalescer, influent pipe, suction and discharge ports, skimmer screen and support legs, as
required for a complete assembly, for either Induced Gas Flotation (IGF) or Dissolved Air
Flotation (DAF) applications. Filtration capacity is determined by the size of the shell.
11. For any activities required which are not in this section, see Page, Richardson or other
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 46 of 51

20. MIXERS
PROPELLER (see note 3)
HP
2 or less
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
PORTABLE
10
15
20
25
---------------------
FIXED
25
25
25
30
35
55
75
100
125
150
180
215
260
310
SPIRAL
RIBBON
60
60
60
65
70
85
100
120
ROTARY
DRUM
90
100
110
120
130
160
190
230
SIGMA BLADE
80
100
110
135
155
190
215
235
250
260
PAN
170
180
190
210
225
260
300
-------
BLENDER (see note 4)
CU. FT.
20 or less
21 to 40
41 to 60
61 to 80
81 to 100
101 to 200
201 to 300
301 to 400
BATCH (see note 5)
CU. FT.
6 or less
7-8
9-10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 47 of 51

20. MIXERS cont.
MIXER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
installing guards.
Work hours for Propeller Mixers include the installation of the shaft, impeller, mounting
device, shaft sealing device and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Blender Mixers include the installation of the trough/drum, outboard
bearings, packing glands, lubrication systems, gearbox, bearing supports, leg mounts and
motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Batch Mixers include the installation of the mixing chamber, end frames,
rotor bearing assembly, dust-stop seals, discharge door, feed hopper, lubrication systems,
gearbox, bedplate and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
A mixer is defined as a device, container or machine that combines or blends into one
mass, two or more materials or products.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 48 of 51

21. SIZE REDUCTION
CRUSHERS (see note 3)
HP
5 or less
6-7
8-10
11-20
21-40
ROTARY
25
30
40
50
60
SAWTOOTH
30
35
50
60
80
HP
5 or less
6-7
8-10
11-20
21-40
41-60
61-80
81-100
101-150
151-200
201-300
SWING
HAMMER
30
35
45
60
95
135
175
210
300
375
450
SWING
JAW
55
75
95
110
140
180
220
250
-------
HP
5 or less
6-7
8-10
11-20
21-40
41-60
61-80
81-100
101-150
151-200
200-250
SINGLE
ROLL
120
150
180
220
270
320
360
---------
GYRATORY
------285
320
370
440
470
540
600
650
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 49 of 51

21. SIZE REDUCTION cont
MILLS (see note 4)
HP
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
TONS
PER
HOUR
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
30
40
50
MICRO
PULVERIZER
--135
150
155
160
170
200
235
270
-----------------------
ATTRITION
30
30
30
35
35
40
50
55
70
80
90
95
110
115
120
130
160
180
230
---
ROLLER
--------------440
500
570
600
640
670
800
1,000
1,080
1,200
1,340
1,450
1,600
BALL MILL
1
----350
390
460
520
560
670
740
870
970
1,070
--440
520
590
700
800
870
1,070
1,170
-------
500
670
800
910
1,070
1,170
1,310
1,510
---------
800
1,070
1,270
1,440
1,740
1,890
2,140
-----------
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 50 of 51

21. SIZE REDUCTION cont
CUTTERS (see note 5)
HP
5 or less
6-7
8-9
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
ROTARY
KNIFE
30
35
40
50
60
80
110
135
155
175
200
215
SIZE REDUCTION NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
installing guards.
Work hours for Size Reduction Crushers include the installation of the cones, shells,
rollers, rotors, toggles, plates, crushing chamber, bearings, gearbox, lubrication systems,
frame and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Size Reduction Mills include the installation of the feed chute assembly,
mill chamber, dump chute assembly, lifter bars, grates, bearings, gearbox, lubrication
systems, frame and motor driver, as required for a complete assembly.
Work hours for Size Reduction Cutters include the installation of the cutting chamber,
rotor assembly, bearings, gearbox, lubrication system, frame and motor driver, as required
for a complete assembly.
000 310 1400

April 2000
Page 51 of 51

22. THICKNERS
CONTINUOUS TYPE (see note 3)
AREA
SQ. FT.
100
200
400
600
800
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
WHs
120
130
150
160
180
190
240
270
300
330
THICKNER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
installing guards.
Work hours for Continuous Type Thickeners include the installation of the rake
mechanism, feed well, bridge, drive head, worm gear and motor driver, as required for a
complete assembly.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 1 of 62
PIPING UNIT WORK HOURS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3
A. GENERAL NOTES
B. STEEL PIPE
1. HANDLING
Fabricated Spools
Straight Run
Page 10
Page 11
2. SCREWED JOINTS and SOCKETWELDS
Page 13
3. WELDS
Buttwelds
Slip-On Flange Welds
Mitre Welds
Olet Welds
Non-Reinforced 90 Nozzle Welds (Stub-ins)
Non-Reinforced 45 Nozzle Welds (Stub-ins)
Reinforced 90 Nozzle Welds (Stub-ins)
Reinforced 45 Nozzle Welds (Stub-ins)
Longitudinal Welds
Preheat
Local Stress Relief
TIG Root Pass
Page 14
Page 16
Page 17
Page 19
Page 21
Page 23
Page 25
Page 27
Page 29
Page 30
Page 31
Page 33
4. PIPE BENDS
Page 34
5. COUPLINGS
Dresser and Victaulic
Page 35
6. STEAM TRACING
Page 37
7. COATING & WRAPPING
Page 40
8. TESTING and CLEANING
Liquid Dye Penetrant
Chemical Cleaning
Page 41
Page 42
9. ALLOY MATERIAL ADJUSTMENTS
Page 43
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 2 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE
10. CAST/DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPE
Page 45
11. CAST IRON SOIL PIPE
Page 46
12. CONCRETE PIPE
Page 47
13. COPPER PIPE
Page 49
14. CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
Page 50
15. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
Page 51
16. POLYPROPYLENE PIPE
Page 52
17. POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Page 53
18. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE
Page 54
D. BOLT-UPS
Page 55
E. VALVE HANDLING
Page 56
F. SPECIALTIES
Page 60
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 3 of 62

A. GENERAL NOTES
1.
The piping erection work hours in this section may need to be supplemented with the following
categories by means of a percentage adder, where they are deemed applicable:
2.
Unload and store (initial delivery only)

Shoes, Guides & Hangers
- Non-Engineered (base ells, angle, plate, u-bolts, etc.)
- Engineered (spring supports)
Hydrotest/Punchout
Consideration for the following difficulties in the erection of piping systems may require additional
work hours:
Multi-level piperacks
Unusual congestion
High elevation
3.
Work hour units for piping are based on in-place operations, with an adjustment for weld bay
applications. This appears as a note in the applicable sections. For definition purposes, in-place
denotes an activity that takes place at the actual erection location. Weld bay on the other hand,
denotes an activity that takes place in a controlled environment, usually away from the erection
location. The adjustment takes into account the expected improvement in production. The weld bay
adjustment is typically applicable to those projects where the execution philosophy determines that
onsite fabrication is more cost effective than utilizing third-party fabrication facilities. This usually
applies to international projects with remote locations. To determine when this philosophy is
applicable, consult Project Management and appropriate Construction department representative.
4.
When estimating linear feet (LF) of pipe, measurement must be taken through all fittings, flanges,
valves, instruments, specialty items and any other in-line appurtenances.
5.
For field erection of some materials, a factory representative may be required. If so, this cost must
be added into the estimate. To verify installation requirements, consult Piping lead engineer.
6.
If internal shot-blast cleaning of pipe is required in the field, this cost must be added into the
estimate. This is typically a sub-contract cost.
7.
Work hour units do not include any time for assisting sub-contractors.
8.
There are no specific tables in this section for flanged fitting steel piping systems. Where required,
the appropriate pipe erection work hours (fabricated spools or straight run) should be used with the
appropriate flange rating work hours for bolt-ups.
9.
There are no specific tables in this section for flanged plastic-lined steel piping systems. These are
specially engineered and always unique. To estimate the erection of these systems, use the pipe
erection work hours for fabricated spools and the appropriate flange rating work hours for bolt-ups.
Special supports and hangers are usually required for these applications. To verify fabrication and
installation requirements, consult Piping lead engineer.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 4 of 62

A. GENERAL NOTES cont.
10. There are no specific tables in this section for jacketed piping systems. These are specially
engineered and always unique. The jacketing application is usually for one of two purposes to
keep the medium in the core pipe at a consistent temperature or to act as a double containment
system to control leaks. Temperature control is usually achieved through the use of steam or hot
oil.
If jacketed system is flanged, use pipe erection work hours for fabricated spools at jacket
size and the appropriate flange rating for bolt-ups at the jacket size.
If jacketed system is welded, use pipe erection work hours for fabricated spools at jacket
size and applicable buttweld work hours for core size, wall thickness and metallurgy. Care
should be taken with jacket welding usually a one foot section has been cut out and split
in half to allow access for the core pipe buttweld. After testing of the core pipe is
complete, the jacket pipe must be welded around the circumference at each end and along
the seam on both sides. The estimator must use the Longitudinal Welding work hour units
for these types of welds. To verify fabrication and installation requirements, consult
Piping lead engineer.
11. When erecting cement lined pipe, add 10% to the base work hour units for special handling and
additional weight.
12. For underground pressure piping systems, thrust blocks at each fitting location must be included as
required per client specification.
13. For any excavation, backfill or concrete activities, see appropriate sections:
000 310 1000

000 310 1100
Earthwork Standard Unit Work hours

Concrete Standard Unit Work hours
14. For various installation details, see Fluor Daniel General Piping Specification Piping Standard
Details (Master Specification 000 250 50040).
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 5 of 62

STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS & WEIGHTS IMPERIAL AND METRIC
PIPE SIZE
NOMINAL
O.D.
INCHES
MM
0.840
15
21.3
20
1
25
1
40
2
50
3
80
1.050
26.7
1.315
33.4
1.900
48.3
2.375
60.3
3.500
88.9
SCHEDULE
DESIGNATIONS
ANSI/ASME
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
160
XXS
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
WALL
THICKNESS
INCH
0.065
0.083
0.109
0.147
0.188
0.294
0.065
0.083
0.113
0.154
0.219
0.308
0.065
0.109
0.133
0.179
0.250
0.358
0.065
0.109
0.145
0.200
0.281
0.400
0.065
0.109
0.154
0.218
0.344
0.436
0.083
0.120
0.216
0.300
0.438
0.600
MM
1.65
2.11
2.77
3.73
4.78
7.47
1.65
2.11
2.87
3.91
5.56
7.82
1.65
2.77
3.38
4.55
6.35
9.09
1.65
2.77
3.68
5.08
7.14
10.16
1.65
2.77
3.91
5.54
8.74
11.07
2.11
3.05
5.49
7.62
11.13
15.24
WEIGHT
LBS/
FOOT
0.5383
0.671
0.851
1.088
1.309
1.714
0.6838
0.8572
1.131
1.474
1.944
2.441
0.8678
1.404
1.679
2.172
2.844
3.659
1.274
2.085
2.718
3.631
4.859
6.408
1.604
2.638
3.653
5.022
7.462
9.029
3.029
4.332
7.576
10.25
14.32
18.58
KG/
METER
0.80
1.00
1.27
1.62
1.95
2.55
1.02
1.28
1.68
2.19
2.89
3.63
1.29
2.09
2.50
3.23
4.23
5.45
1.90
3.10
4.05
5.40
7.23
9.54
2.39
3.93
5.44
7.47
11.11
13.44
4.51
6.45
11.27
15.25
21.31
27.65
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 6 of 62

STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS & WEIGHTS IMPERIAL AND METRIC cont.
PIPE SIZE
NOMINAL
O.D.
INCHES
MM
4
4.500
100
114.3
6
150
8
200
10
250
6.625
168.3
8.625
219.1
SCHEDULE
DESIGNATIONS
ANSI/ASME
5
10
STD
XS
120
160
XXS
5
10
STD
XS
120
160
XXS
10
20
30
STD
60
XS
100
120
140
XXS
160
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
40
80
5S
10S
40S
80S
5S
10S
40
40S
80
80S
10.750
273.1
5S
10S
20
30
STD
XS
80
100
120
140
160
40
60
XXS
40S
80S
WALL
THICKNESS
INCH
0.083
0.120
0.237
0.337
0.438
0.531
0.674
0.109
0.134
0.280
0.432
0.562
0.719
0.864
0.109
0.148
0.250
0.277
0.322
0.406
0.500
0.594
0.719
0.812
0.875
0.906
0.134
0.165
0.250
0.307
0.365
0.500
0.594
0.719
0.844
1.000
1.125
MM
2.11
3.05
6.02
8.56
11.13
13.49
17.12
2.77
3.40
7.11
10.97
14.27
18.26
21.95
2.77
3.76
6.35
7.04
8.18
10.31
12.70
15.09
18.26
20.62
22.23
23.01
3.40
4.19
6.35
7.80
9.27
12.70
15.09
18.26
21.44
25.40
28.58
WEIGHT
LBS/
FOOT
3.915
5.613
10.79
14.98
19.00
22.51
27.54
7.585
9.289
18.97
28.57
36.39
45.35
53.16
9.914
13.40
22.36
24.70
28.55
35.64
43.39
50.95
60.71
67.76
72.42
74.69
15.19
18.70
28.04
34.24
40.48
54.74
64.43
77.03
89.29
104.13
115.64
KG/
METER
5.83
8.35
16.06
22.29
28.28
33.50
40.99
11.29
13.82
28.23
42.52
54.16
67.49
79.12
14.75
19.94
33.28
36.76
42.49
53.04
64.58
75.83
90.35
100.84
107.78
111.16
22.61
27.83
41.73
50.96
60.24
81.47
95.89
114.64
132.89
154.97
172.10
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 7 of 62

PIPE SIZE
NOMINAL
O.D.
INCHES
MM
12
12.750
300
323.9
SCHEDULE
DESIGNATIONS
WALL
THICKNESS
ANSI/ASME
INCH MM
0.156 3.96
0.180 4.57
0.250 6.35
0.330 8.38
0.375 9.53
0.406 10.31
0.500 12.70
0.562 14.27
0.688 17.48
0.844 21.44
1.000 25.40
1.125 28.58
1.312 33.32
0.188 4.78
0.250 6.35
0.312 7.92
0.375 9.53
0.438 11.13
0.500 12.70
0.594 15.09
0.750 19.05
0.938 23.83
1.094 27.79
1.250 31.75
1.406 35.71
0.188 4.78
0.250 6.35
0.312 7.92
0.375 9.53
0.500 12.70
0.656 16.66
0.844 21.44
1.031 26.20
1.219 30.96
1.438 36.53
1.594 40.49
5S
10S
20
30
STD
40
XS
60
80
100
120
140
160
14
350
16
400
14.000
355.6
16.00
406.4
40S
80S
XXS
10S
10
20
STD
40
XS
60
80
100
120
140
160
30
40S
80S
10S
10
20
STD
XS
60
80
100
120
140
160
30
40
40S
80S
WEIGHT
LBS/
FOOT
20.98
24.20
33.38
43.77
49.56
53.52
65.42
73.15
88.63
107.32
125.49
139.67
160.27
27.73
36.71
45.61
54.57
63.44
72.09
85.05
106.13
130.85
150.90
170.21
189.10
31.75
42.05
52.27
62.58
82.77
107.50
136.61
164.82
192.43
223.64
245.25
KG/
METER
31.22
36.02
49.68
65.14
73.76
79.65
97.36
108.87
131.90
159.72
186.76
207.86
238.52
41.27
54.63
67.88
81.21
94.41
107.29
126.58
157.95
194.74
224.58
253.32
281.43
47.25
62.58
77.79
93.13
123.18
159.99
203.31
245.29
286.38
332.83
364.99
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 8 of 62

PIPE SIZE
NOMINAL
O.D.
INCHES
MM
18
18.000
450
457.2
20
500
24
600
20.000
508
24.000
609.6
SCHEDULE
DESIGNATIONS
WALL
THICKNESS
ANSI/ASME
INCH MM
0.188 4.78
0.250 6.35
0.312 7.92
0.375 9.53
0.438 11.13
0.500 12.70
0.562 14.27
0.750 19.05
0.938 23.83
1.156 29.36
1.375 34.93
1.562 39.67
1.781 45.24
0.218 5.54
0.250 6.35
0.375 9.53
0.500 12.70
0.594 15.09
0.812 20.62
1.031 26.19
1.281 32.54
1.500 38.10
1.750 44.45
1.969 50.01
0.250 6.35
0.375 9.53
0.500 12.70
0.562 14.27
0.688 17.48
0.969 24.61
1.219 30.96
1.531 38.89
1.812 46.02
2.062 52.37
2.344 59.54
10S
10
20
STD
30
XS
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
40S
80S
10S
10
STD
XS
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10
STD
XS
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
20
30
40S
80S
20
10S
40S
80S
WEIGHT
LBS/
FOOT
35.76
47.39
58.94
70.59
82.15
93.45
104.67
138.17
170.92
207.96
244.14
274.22
308.50
46.06
52.73
78.60
104.13
123.11
166.40
208.87
256.10
296.37
341.09
379.17
63.41
94.62
125.49
140.68
171.29
238.35
296.58
367.39
429.39
483.10
542.13
KG/
METER
53.22
70.53
87.72
105.06
122.26
139.08
155.78
205.63
254.37
309.50
363.34
408.11
459.13
68.55
78.48
116.98
154.97
183.22
247.65
310.85
381.14
441.07
507.63
564.30
94.37
140.82
186.76
209.37
254.92
354.72
441.39
546.77
639.04
718.97
806.83
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 9 of 62

PIPE SIZE
NOMINAL
O.D.
INCHES
MM
30
30.000
750
762
36
900
36.000
914.4
42
1050
42.000
1066.8
48
1200
48.000
1219.2
SCHEDULE
DESIGNATIONS
ANSI/ASME
10
STD
XS
30
10
STD
XS
STD
XS
30
40
STD
XS
20
40S
80S
40S
80S
40S
80S
40S
80S
WALL
THICKNESS
INCH
0.312
0.375
0.500
0.625
0.312
0.375
0.500
0.375
0.500
0.625
0.750
0.375
0.500
MM
7.92
9.53
12.70
15.88
7.92
9.53
12.70
9.53
12.70
15.88
19.05
9.53
12.70
WEIGHT
LBS/
FOOT
98.93
118.65
157.53
196.08
118.92
142.68
189.57
166.71
221.61
276.18
330.41
190.74
253.65
KG/
METER
147.23
176.58
234.44
291.82
176.98
212.34
282.13
248.11
329.81
411.02
491.73
283.87
377.49
WEIGHT OF STEEL PIPE PER FOOT FORMULA:

(OD WT) x WT x 10.68 = LBS/LF
IMPERIAL
(OD WT) x WT x 15.8945 = KG/METER
METRIC
OR
LBS/LF x 1.48825 = KG/METER

KEY:
OD = OUTSIDE DIAMETER
WT = WALL THICKNESS
LBS = POUNDS
LF = LINEAR FEET
KG = KILOGRAMS
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 10 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE
1. HANDLING
WHs PER LF
FABRICATED SPOOLS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
STD
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.0
2.5
XS
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.7
3.8
0.375
3.1
3.3
3.4
3.6
3.7
3.9
0.500
4.1
4.4
4.5
4.8
4.9
5.2
S/10
S/20
S/30
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.0
2.5
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.7
3.4
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.7
1.9
2.0
2.6
3.2
4.6
S/40
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.2
2.4
2.6
3.2
4.6
0.750
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
1.000
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
1.250
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
1.500
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
S/60
0.9
1.2
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
S/80
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
1.750
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
2.000
5.0
5.3
5.4
5.8
5.9
6.2
S/100
S/120
S/140
1.1
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
1.1
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
S/160
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.6
XXS
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.8
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 11 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
1. HANDLING cont.
WHs PER LF
STRAIGHT RUNS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
STD
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.3
XS
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.9
0.375
1.6
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
0.500
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
S/10
S/20
S/30
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
1.3
1.7
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.3
S/40
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.6
2.3
0.750
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
1.000
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
1.250
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
1.500
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
S/60
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
S/80
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.750
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
2.000
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
S/100
S/120
S/140
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
S/160
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
XXS
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 12 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
1. HANDLING cont.
HANDLING NOTES
1.
Work hour units include unload, storage and handling to erection site.
2.
Work hour units are for pipe erection only and do not include welding, bolt-ups or valve erection.
3.
For unlisted sizes, use the next higher listing.
4.
LW column represents Light Wall, typically S/5, S/5S, S/10 and S/10S with wall thickness less than thick (less than 0.250).
5.
For pipe removal, multiply standard units by 50% if piping will be disposed of or use net if piping will be reinstalled (remember to use units
again for the reinstallation).
6.
For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, or other recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 13 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
2. SCREWED JOINTS and SOCKETWELDS
WHs EACH
SCREWED JOINTS
Pipe Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
All Ratings
0.35
0.35
0.45
0.65
0.80
1.35
1.85
2.60
SOCKETWELDS
Pipe Size
1
1
2
3000#
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
6000#
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.1
1.2
9000#
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.5
1.7
SCREWED JOINT and SOCKETWELD NOTES

1.
Work hour units include handling of equipment, set-up, operation and disassemble, at erection
site.
2.
Work hour units for screwed joints include handling, cutting, threading and joint make-on.
3.
Work hour units for socketwelds include handling, cutting and socket welding.
4.
Work hour units for socketwelds are in-place. For weld bay, multiply standard units by 80%.
5.
For seal welding screwed joints, multiply 3000# socketweld standard units by 50%.
6.
For alloy fabrication adjustments, see Alloy Material Adjustment section.
7.
The correlation between class rating categories and pipe wall thickness is as follows:
3000#
wall thickness up to and including XS
6000#
wall thickness > XS up to and including S/160
9000#
wall thickness XXS
8.
For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, or other
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 14 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS
WHs EACH
BUTTWELDS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.5
1.6
2.5
3.6
4.1
4.9
5.3
6.1
6.8
7.6
STD
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.8
3.6
4.5
5.2
6.1
7.0
7.8
8.6
10.0
12.5
15.0
XS
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.4
2.0
2.6
3.7
4.9
5.8
6.9
8.3
8.9
10.5
11.2
13.4
16.7
20
0.375
17.5
20
23
25
28
30
0.500
23
27
30
34
37
40
S/10
S/20
S/30
5.3
6.1
6.8
7.6
9.2
11.4
13.7
3.6
4.1
4.9
5.7
6.7
7.8
8.6
10.0
16.7
20
3.6
4.3
5.1
6.1
7.0
9.3
11.2
14.7
21
25
S/40
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.8
3.6
4.5
5.9
7.1
8.9
11.5
13.0
17.6
24
30
0.750
*35
*40
*45
*50
*55
*60
1.000
*47
*54
*60
*67
*74
*80
1.250
*59
*67
*75
*84
*92
*101
1.500
*70
*80
*90
*101
*111
*121
S/60
4.5
5.8
7.5
9.5
11.8
*15.7
*19.4
*27
S/80
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.4
2.0
2.6
3.7
4.9
7.3
9.4
*13.4
*16.6
*22
*27
*33
1.750
*82
*94
*106
*117
*129
*141
2.000
*94
*107
*121
*134
*147
*161
S/100
S/120
S/140
6.5
9.6
*13.8
*18.0
*24
*29
*36
*45
3.6
5.5
8.6
*13.3
*17.7
*23
*29
*36
*44
*55
*11.0
*16.6
*22
*27
*35
*43
*51
*63
S/160
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.7
2.2
2.8
4.3
7.2
*12.7
*19.7
*27
*32
*40
*49
*57
*75
XXS
1.1
1.1
1.6
2.5
3.0
3.9
5.8
*9.5
*11.9
*16.6
*17.7
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 15 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
BUTTWELD NOTES
1.
Work hour units include handling of equipment, set-up, operation and disassemble, at erection site.
2.
Work hour units include cutting, beveling and welding.
3.
Work hour units are for welding in-place. For weld bay, multiply standard units by 80%.
4.
* Indicates wall thickness equal to or greater than thick (0.750) and requires preheat and stress relief for carbon steel, high yield
carbon steel and low temp carbon steel. See Preheat and Local Stress Relief sections for these operations.
5.
For other materials requiring preheat and stress relief, see Alloy Material Adjustment section.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For sizes above 72, the work hours are proportional to the largest size listed with the same wall thickness.
10. For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, or other recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 16 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
SLIP-ON FLANGE WELDS

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
150#
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.1
1.5
2.1
2.7
3.4
3.9
4.6
5.3
5.9
6.5
7.5
9.4
11.3
13.1
300#
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.4
3.1
3.9
4.5
5.3
6.0
6.7
7.4
8.6
10.8
12.9
15.1
600#
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.9
3.7
4.7
5.4
6.3
7.2
8.1
8.9
10.4
12.9
15.5
18.1
900#
----------1.9
2.6
3.6
4.7
5.8
6.7
7.9
9.1
10.1
11.1
12.9
16.2
19.4
---
1500#
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.6
3.5
4.9
6.3
7.9
9.1
10.7
12.2
13.6
15.0
17.5
-------
2500#
1.8
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.9
3.9
5.2
7.3
9.4
11.8
13.6
-----------------
SLIP-ON FLANGE WELD NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include cutting, slipping on flange and welding at front and back.
3.
4.
In 900# flange rated systems, through 2 flanges are always increased to 1500#.
5.
For a list of materials requiring preheat and stress relief, see Alloy Material Adjustment
section.
6.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 17 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
MITRE WELDS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.7
2.3
2.4
3.8
5.4
6.1
7.4
8.0
9.2
10.2
11.4
STD
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.2
5.4
6.8
7.8
9.2
10.5
11.8
12.9
15.0
18.8
23
XS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.6
2.0
3.0
3.9
5.6
7.4
8.7
10.4
12.4
13.4
15.7
16.8
20.1
25
30
0.375
26
30
34
38
41
45
0.500
35
40
45
50
55
60
S/10
S/20
S/30
8.0
9.2
10.2
11.4
13.8
17.2
21
5.4
6.2
7.4
8.6
10.0
11.7
12.9
15.0
25
30
5.4
6.5
7.7
9.2
10.5
14.0
17.0
22
31
38
S/40
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.2
5.4
6.8
8.9
10.7
13.4
17.3
20
26
36
45
0.750
*53
*60
*68
*75
*83
*90
1.000
*70
*80
*90
*101
*111
*121
1.250
*88
*101
*113
*126
*138
*151
1.500
*106
*121
*136
*151
*166
*181
S/60
6.8
8.7
11.3
14.3
17.7
*24
*29
*40
S/80
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.6
2.0
3.0
3.9
5.6
7.4
11.0
14.1
*20
*25
*33
*40
*50
1.750
*123
*141
*158
*176
*193
*211
2.000
*141
*161
*181
*201
*221
*241
S/100
S/120
S/140
9.8
14.4
*21
*27
*35
*44
*54
*68
5.4
8.3
12.9
*20
*27
*34
*44
*54
*67
*83
*16.5
*25
*33
*41
*52
*64
*77
*94
S/160
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.6
3.4
4.2
6.5
10.8
*19.0
*30
*40
*48
*60
*74
*85
*112
XXS
1.7
1.7
2.3
3.7
4.4
5.9
8.7
*14.2
*17.8
*25
*27
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 18 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
MITRE WELD NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 19 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
OLET WELDS
Outlet
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
Header
Size
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
STD
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.5
6.0
7.5
7.5
9.0
12.0
15.0
19.5
24
29
36
3000#/
XS
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.5
4.5
7.5
10.5
12.0
16.5
21
29
35
39
45
51
6000#/
S/160
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
12.0
18.0
*27
*35
*50
-----------
9000#/
XXS
4.5
4.5
4.5
6.0
7.5
9.0
12.0
*18.0
*27
*35
*50
-----------
OLET WELD NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting and welding.
3.
Work hour units are for Thredolets (threaded branches up to 4), Sockolets (socketweld
branches up to 4), Nipolets (plain-end or threaded-end nipple-type branch up to 2) and
Weldolets (butt weld branches up to 24).
4.
For Elbolets or Latrolets, multiply standard units by 1.5 (Elbolets are outlets on 90 elbows
threaded and socketweld up to 2, butt weld up to 4; Latrolets are 45 branch connections
threaded and socketweld up to 2, butt weld up to 4).
5.
For Sweepolets, multiply standard units by 3.0 (Sweepolets are similar to Weldolets but with
more area replacement - butt weld branches up to 24).
6.
Work hour unit selection should be based on the outlet size and wall thickness except when
the header wall thickness is greater than the outlet wall thickness, in which case the selection
should be based on the outlet size and the header wall thickness.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 20 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
OLET WELD NOTES cont.
8.
* Indicates wall thickness equal to or greater than thick (0.750) and requires preheat
and stress relief for carbon steel, high yield carbon steel and low temp carbon steel. See
Preheat and Local Stress Relief sections for these operations.
9.
10. For alloy fabrication adjustments, see Alloy Material Adjustment section.
11. For unlisted sizes, use the next higher listing.
12. The correlation between class rating categories and pipe wall thickness is as follows:
3000#
wall thickness up to and including XS
6000#
wall thickness > XS up to and including S/160
9000#
wall thickness XXS
13. For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, or other
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 21 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
NON-REINFORCED 90 NOZZLE WELDS (STUB-INS)

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
1.4
1.6
1.6
1.8
2.3
3.1
3.4
5.2
6.8
8.6
10.1
10.9
12.7
14.0
15.9
STD
1.4
1.6
1.6
1.8
2.3
3.1
4.2
5.9
7.5
9.4
10.8
12.7
14.6
16.4
17.9
21
26
31
XS
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.9
4.2
5.5
7.7
10.1
12.1
14.3
17.2
18.5
22
23
27
35
42
0.375
36
42
47
52
57
62
0.500
49
56
62
70
77
83
S/10
S/20
S/30
11.1
12.7
14.2
15.9
19.1
24
29
7.4
8.6
10.1
11.8
13.9
16.3
17.9
21
35
42
7.5
9.0
10.7
12.7
14.6
19.4
24
30
44
52
S/40
1.4
1.6
1.6
1.8
2.3
3.1
4.2
5.9
7.5
9.4
12.2
14.8
18.5
24
27
36
49
62
0.750
*73
*83
*94
*104
*114
*125
1.000
*98
*112
*125
*139
*153
*168
1.250
*122
*139
*157
*174
*191
*209
1.500
*147
*168
*189
*209
*230
*251
S/60
9.4
12.1
15.6
19.8
25
*33
*40
*56
S/80
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.9
4.2
5.5
7.7
10.1
15.2
19.5
*27
*35
*46
*56
*69
1.750
*170
*195
*220
*244
*268
*293
2.000
*195
*224
*251
*278
*307
*334
S/100
S/120
S/140
13.5
20
*29
*38
*49
*61
*75
*94
7.5
11.4
17.9
*27
*36
*47
*61
*75
*92
*114
*23
*35
*46
*56
*73
*88
*107
*130
S/160
2.0
2.1
2.6
3.5
4.7
5.9
9.0
15.0
*26
*42
*55
*68
*83
*103
*118
*156
XXS
2.3
2.3
3.3
5.1
6.1
8.1
12.0
*19.8
*25
*35
*49
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 22 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
NON-REINFORCED 90 NOZZLE WELD (STUB-IN) NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding of plain nozzles.
3.
Work hour unit selection should be based on the wall thickness of the pipe used for the nozzle.
4.
For size-on-size nozzle welds, multiply standard units by 1.3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

11. For sizes above 72, the work hours are proportional to the largest size listed with the same wall thickness.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 23 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
NON-REINFORCED 45 NOZZLE WELDS (STUB-INS)

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.2
3.0
3.9
4.3
6.5
8.2
10.8
12.7
13.7
16.0
17.6
19.9
STD
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.2
3.0
3.9
5.2
7.3
9.4
11.7
13.5
15.9
18.2
21
22
26
33
39
XS
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.7
3.5
5.2
6.8
9.6
12.7
15.1
17.9
22
23
27
29
35
44
52
0.375
46
52
59
65
72
78
0.500
61
70
78
87
96
104
S/10
S/20
S/30
13.8
15.9
17.7
19.8
24
30
35
9.4
10.7
12.7
14.8
17.4
20
22
26
44
52
9.4
11.2
13.3
15.9
18.2
24
30
38
55
65
S/40
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.2
3.0
3.9
5.2
7.3
9.4
11.7
15.3
18.5
23
30
34
46
62
78
0.750
*91
*104
*117
*131
*144
*157
1.000
*122
*139
*157
*174
*191
*209
1.250
*152
*174
*196
*218
*239
*261
1.500
*183
*209
*235
*261
*287
*313
S/60
11.7
15.1
19.5
25
31
*40
*51
*69
S/80
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.7
3.5
5.2
6.8
9.6
12.7
19.0
25
*35
*43
*57
*69
*87
1.750
*213
*244
*274
*306
*335
*365
2.000
*244
*278
*313
*348
*384
*419
S/100
S/120
S/140
16.9
25
*36
*47
*61
*77
*94
*117
9.4
14.3
22
*35
*46
*60
*75
*94
*116
*143
*29
*43
*57
*70
*91
*111
*134
*164
S/160
2.5
2.6
3.4
4.4
5.9
7.3
11.2
18.7
*33
*51
*69
*85
*104
*129
*147
*195
XXS
2.9
3.0
4.0
6.4
7.7
10.1
15.1
*25
*31
*43
*59
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 24 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
NON-REINFORCED 45 NOZZLE WELD (STUB-IN) NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding of plain nozzles.
3.
Work hour unit selection should be based on the wall thickness of the pipe used for the nozzle.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 25 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
REINFORCED 90 NOZZLE WELDS (STUB-INS)

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
2.6
2.7
2.9
3.1
4.2
5.5
6.0
9.1
12.0
15.1
17.8
19.1
22
25
27
STD
2.6
2.7
2.9
3.1
4.2
5.5
7.3
10.1
13.1
16.4
19.0
22
25
29
31
36
46
55
XS
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.9
4.9
7.3
9.5
13.5
17.8
21
25
30
33
38
40
48
61
73
0.375
64
73
82
91
100
109
0.500
86
98
109
122
134
147
S/10
S/20
S/30
19.2
22
25
27
34
42
49
13.0
15.0
17.8
21
24
29
31
36
61
73
13.1
15.6
18.6
22
25
34
42
53
77
91
S/40
2.6
2.7
2.9
3.1
4.2
5.5
7.3
10.1
13.1
16.4
21
26
33
42
47
64
87
109
0.750
*127
*147
*165
*183
*202
*220
1.000
*170
*195
*220
*244
*268
*293
1.250
*213
*244
*274
*306
*335
*365
1.500
*256
*293
*329
*365
*403
*439
S/60
16.4
21
27
35
43
*57
*70
*96
S/80
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.9
4.9
7.3
9.5
13.5
17.8
26
34
*49
*60
*81
*96
*122
1.750
*299
*342
*384
*426
*469
*512
2.000
*342
*390
*439
*488
*537
*585
S/100
S/120
S/140
24
35
*51
*65
*86
*107
*131
*164
13.1
20
31
*48
*65
*83
*105
*131
*161
*200
*40
*60
*81
*99
*126
*155
*187
*229
S/160
3.5
3.5
4.7
6.2
8.2
10.1
15.6
26
*47
*72
*96
*117
*147
*179
*207
*273
XXS
4.0
4.2
5.7
9.0
10.8
14.2
21
*35
*43
*60
*78
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 26 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
REINFORCED 90 NOZZLE WELD (STUB-IN) NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding, including the use of reinforcing pads or welding saddles, as specified.
3.
Work hour unit selection should be based on the wall thickness of the pipe used for the nozzle or the thickness of the reinforcing
pad/welding saddle, whichever is greater.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 27 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
WHs EACH
REINFORCED 45 NOZZLE WELDS (STUB-INS)

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
3.0
3.1
3.3
3.6
4.7
6.2
6.8
10.4
13.8
17.2
20
22
26
29
31
STD
3.0
3.1
3.3
3.6
4.7
6.2
8.3
11.7
15.0
18.7
22
26
29
33
36
42
52
62
XS
3.1
3.3
3.6
4.4
5.7
8.3
10.8
15.3
20
21
25
30
33
38
40
48
61
73
0.375
64
73
82
91
100
109
0.500
86
98
109
122
134
147
S/10
S/20
S/30
22
23
25
27
34
42
49
15.0
17.0
20
24
27
33
36
42
70
73
15.0
17.9
21
26
29
39
47
61
87
91
S/40
3.0
3.1
3.3
3.6
4.7
6.2
8.3
11.7
15.0
18.7
25
30
36
48
55
73
91
109
0.750
*127
*147
*165
*183
*202
*220
1.000
*170
*195
*220
*244
*268
*293
1.250
*213
*244
*274
*306
*335
*365
1.500
*256
*293
*329
*365
*403
*439
S/60
18.7
24
31
39
49
*65
*81
*111
S/80
3.1
3.3
3.6
4.4
5.7
8.3
10.8
15.3
20
26
39
*56
*69
*91
*111
*139
1.750
*299
*342
*384
*426
*469
*512
2.000
*342
*390
*439
*488
*537
*585
S/100
S/120
S/140
27
40
*57
*75
*99
*122
*150
*187
15.0
23
36
*56
*74
*95
*121
*151
*185
*229
*46
*69
*92
*113
*144
*177
*213
*261
S/160
3.9
4.0
5.3
7.2
9.4
11.7
17.9
26
*53
*82
*111
*134
*168
*205
*235
*312
XXS
4.7
4.7
6.5
10.3
12.2
16.3
24
*39
*49
*69
*87
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 28 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
REINFORCED 45 NOZZLE WELD (STUB-IN) NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding, including the use of reinforcing pads or welding saddles, as specified.
3.
Work hour unit selection should be based on the wall thickness of the pipe used for the nozzle or the thickness of the reinforcing
pad/welding saddle, whichever is greater.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 29 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
LONGITUDINAL WELDS
Wall
Thickness
0.375
0.500
0.750
1.000
WHs per
Lineal Inch
0.23
0.33
*0.52
*0.74
LONGITUDINAL WELD NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting, beveling and welding.
3.
4.
* Indicates wall thickness equal to or greater than thick (0.750) and requires preheat
and stress relief for carbon steel, high yield carbon steel and low temp carbon steel. See
Preheat and Local Stress Relief sections for these operations.
5.
6.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 30 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
PREHEAT
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
0.14
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.30
0.32
0.50
0.72
0.82
0.98
1.06
1.22
1.36
1.52
STD
0.14
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.30
0.40
0.56
0.72
0.90
1.04
1.22
1.40
1.56
1.72
2.00
2.50
3.00
XS
0.16
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.28
0.40
0.52
0.74
0.98
1.16
1.38
1.66
1.78
2.10
2.24
2.68
3.34
4.00
0.375
3.50
4.00
4.60
5.00
5.60
6.00
0.500
4.60
5.40
6.00
6.80
7.40
8.00
S/10
S/20
S/30
1.06
1.22
1.36
1.52
1.84
2.28
2.74
0.72
0.82
0.98
1.14
1.34
1.56
1.72
2.00
3.34
4.00
0.72
0.86
1.02
1.22
1.40
1.86
2.24
2.94
4.20
5.00
S/40
0.14
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.30
0.40
0.56
0.72
0.90
1.18
1.42
1.78
2.30
2.60
3.52
4.80
6.00
0.750
7.00
8.00
9.00
10
11
12
1.000
9.40
11
12
13
15
16
1.250
12
13
15
17
18
20
1.500
14
16
18
20
22
24
S/60
0.90
1.16
1.50
1.90
2.36
3.14
3.88
5.40
S/80
0.16
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.28
0.40
0.52
0.74
0.98
1.46
1.88
2.68
3.32
4.40
5.40
6.60
1.750
16
19
21
23
26
28
2.000
19
21
24
27
29
32
S/100
S/120
S/140
1.30
1.92
2.76
3.60
4.80
5.80
7.20
9.00
0.72
1.10
1.72
2.66
3.54
4.60
5.80
7.20
8.80
11
2.20
3.32
4.40
5.40
7.00
8.60
10
13
S/160
0.20
0.20
0.26
0.34
0.44
0.56
0.86
1.44
2.54
3.94
5.40
6.40
8.00
9.80
11
15
XXS
0.22
0.22
0.32
0.50
0.60
0.78
1.16
1.90
2.38
3.32
3.54
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 31 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
LOCAL STRESS RELIEF
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
LW
1.6
1.6
1.9
2.5
3.0
4.3
5.4
7.6
9.7
12
14
15
17
19
21
STD
1.6
1.6
1.9
2.5
3.0
4.3
5.4
7.6
9.7
12
14
15
17
19
21
25
32
38
XS
1.7
1.7
2.1
2.7
3.3
4.7
5.8
8.2
10
13
15
16
18
20
22
26
32
38
0.375
44
50
57
63
69
76
0.500
45
51
58
64
70
77
S/10
S/20
S/30
15
17
19
21
25
32
38
9.7
12
14
15
17
19
21
25
32
38
9.7
12
14
15
17
19
22
26
33
39
S/40
1.6
1.6
1.9
2.5
3.0
4.3
5.4
7.6
9.7
12
14
15
18
20
22
26
34
40
0.750
47
53
60
67
73
80
1.000
49
56
63
70
77
83
1.250
51
58
65
72
80
87
1.500
53
60
68
75
83
90
S/60
10
13
15
16
18
21
23
28
S/80
1.7
1.7
2.1
2.7
3.3
4.7
5.8
8.2
11
13
15
17
19
22
24
29
1.750
55
62
70
78
86
94
2.000
57
65
73
81
89
97
S/100
S/120
S/140
11
14
16
18
20
23
25
30
6.2
8.8
11
14
17
18
21
24
26
32
12
15
17
19
22
24
27
33
S/160
1.9
1.9
2.3
3.0
3.7
5.2
6.5
9.4
12
15
18
20
23
25
28
34
XXS
2.2
2.2
2.6
3.4
4.0
5.7
7.1
10
12
15
17
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 32 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
PREHEAT & LOCAL STRESS RELIEF NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include wrapping pipe with blanket, stringing out wires & connectors, monitoring of temperature and removal of blanket
and wire harness.
3.
Work hour units are for in-place welds. For weld bay, multiply standard units by 80%.
4.
Preheat work hours are based on 20% of the corresponding carbon steel buttweld work hour units.
5.
For a list of materials requiring preheat and stress relief, see Alloy Material Adjustment section.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Field stress relief is typically a subcontract item. These work hours can be used as an aid for scheduling purposes.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 33 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
3. WELDS cont.
T.I.G. ROOT PASS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
All Wall
Thicknesses
0.23
0.23
0.26
0.29
0.32
0.47
0.58
0.84
1.1
1.5
1.8
2.0
Pipe
Size
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
All Wall
Thicknesses
2.2
2.5
2.7
3.2
4.1
4.9
5.7
6.5
7.3
8.1
8.9
9.8
T.I.G. ROOT PASS NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units are applicable to buttwelds only. For olet welds, nozzle welds or other welds,
multiply standard units by 2.0.
3.
Work hour units are applicable for all materials of construction. No alloy fabrication
adjustments are required. Consult project specific welding specifications as well as Piping lead
engineer for application requirements.
4.
Work hour units include an internal nitrogen purge, where required. For an internal Argon
purge, multiply standard units by 1.25.
5.
Work hour units are for in-place welds. For weld bay, multiply standard units by 80%.
6.
7.
For sizes above 72, the work hours are proportional to the largest size listed with the same
wall thickness.
8.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 34 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
4. PIPE BENDS
ALL WALL THICKNESSES THROUGH XS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
Five Dia. Radius thru 78 (6-6)

90 or 91 to 181 to 271
less
180
270
360
2.0
2.7
4.7
5.5
2.2
3.3
5.5
6.5
2.7
4.0
6.8
8.1
3.9
5.7
9.6
11.4
4.7
7.2
11.8
14.3
7.4
10.5
17.9
21
9.4
13.7
23
27
19.4
26
46
51
79 (6-7) thru 156 (13-0) Radius

90 or 91 to 181 to 271
less
180
270
360
3.9
7.8
11.7
15.6
4.4
8.8
13.3
17.7
5.5
10.9
16.4
22
7.8
15.6
23
31
9.4
18.7
29
38
14.8
30
44
60
18.7
38
56
75
39
78
116
155
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
157 (13-1) thru 234 (19-6) Radius

90 or 91 to 181 to 271
less
180
270
360
5.9
11.7
17.6
23
6.6
13.3
19.9
26
8.2
16.4
25
33
11.7
23
35
47
14.0
29
42
56
22
44
66
88
29
56
85
112
59
116
174
231
235 (19-7) thru 312 (26-0) Radius

90 or 91 to 181 to 271
less
180
270
360
7.8
15.6
23
31
8.8
17.7
26
35
10.9
22
33
44
15.6
31
47
62
18.7
38
56
75
30
60
88
118
38
75
112
150
78
155
233
309
PIPE BEND NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include layout and bending.
3.
For wall thicknesses greater than XS, multiply standard units by 1.3.
4.
Work hour units are for bending in-place. For weld bay, multiply standard units by 80%.
5.
6.
Work hour units for field bends are in addition to the work hour units for handling the pipe.
The actual bend is part of the linear footage quantity. The standard units for Handling
Fabricated Spools must be used for the erection of pipe bends.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 35 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
5. COUPLINGS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
DRESSER
Style 38
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.3
1.8
2.5
3.0
4.4
5.3
6.7
7.6
8.2
9.5
10.4
11.7
13.9
17.0
20
23
26
29
32
36
39
VICTAULIC
Style 77
--0.6
0.8
1.1
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.7
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.8
6.5
7.1
7.9
9.0
1.3
---------------
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 36 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
5. COUPLINGS cont.
COUPLING NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include cutting, grooving, installation and bolt up.
3.
4.
Work hour units are provided for each manufacturers most commonly used style, in the size
range available. Other coupling manufacturers include Grayloc and Dur-o-lok. These different
couplings are not interchangeable. Their use is for specific applications that must be
identified. To determine which is applicable, consult Piping lead engineer.
5.
In some instances, Dresser Couplings require the use of a Dresser Joint Harness. These are
steel tie-bolts, diametrically opposite, which extend across the joint from lugs welded to the
pipe on either side of the joint. Joint Harnesses are particularly effective on unanchored bends
subject to pulsating pressures of sharp intensity. To verify installation requirements, consult
Piping lead engineer. The standard unit work hours above do not include the installation of
these and must be added to the estimate.
6.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 37 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
6. STEAM TRACING
BARE TUBING
WHs PER LF
COPPER
0.14
0.16
0.18
OD
OD
OD
TUBING FITTINGS
OD
OD
OD
SS
0.18
0.20
0.22
WHs/EACH (BRASS OR SS)

PIPE TO TUBE
CONNECTOR
(MALE OR FEMALE)
0.20
0.21
0.22
PRE-INSULATED TUBING
UNION
0.22
0.26
0.28
TEE
0.29
0.30
0.33
WHs PER LF
COPPER
0.11
0.13
0.15
OD
OD
OD
HEAT TRANSFER CEMENT
WITH CHANNEL-TYPE COVER
SS
0.13
0.15
0.17
WHs PER LF
0.12
STEAM TRACING NOTES

1.
2.
Work hour units include layout, cutting and deburring, bending, compression joints and
securing tubing to pipeline.
3.
A common system will consist of one or more bare tubing tracers placed parallel to the line
being protected. The tubing is kept in close contact with the pipeline by wiring or banding so
that good heat transfer is achieved. Maximum heat transfer is achieved by bonding the tubing
to the pipeline by means of heat transfer cement. To verify installation requirements, consult
Piping lead engineer.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 38 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
6. STEAM TRACING cont.
STEAM TRACING NOTES cont.
4.
The total linear footage of tubing required per pipeline is equal to the linear footage of pipe
(as measured through all fittings, flanges, valves, instruments, specialty items and any other
in-line appurtenances) plus the equivalent tubing length for each valve associated with the
pipeline. This requirement is due to the valve being wrapped or coiled to ensure complete
protection. Tubing unions are used in the tubing run at the valve flanges to allow for valve
removal or replacement. The following table provides the approximate tubing length in feet
for valves by size, based on an industry standard from a major manufacturer:
Pipe Size
1 & below
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
5.
LF per valve
1
3
4
5
8
10
12
15
21
24
28
30
36
45
54
The number of tracers required is determined by the combination of steam pressure, desired
process temperature and diameter of the pipeline. When this information is available, refer to
the project specific standard for the exact tracer quantity. The following table may be used as
a generic go-by when the available steam pressure and/or desired process temperature is not
known:
Pipe Size
10
12 14
16 18
20 24
30 36
No. of tracers
1
2
3
4
5
The tracer quantity is a critical component of the steam tracing system cost because for each
tracer there is a branch connection from a steam supply header or manifold that includes a
valve, steam trap and strainer. This cost can be quite significant based on the overall number
of tracers required. The branch connection on the condensate return manifold or header is
only a valve, but this cost can become significant also.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 39 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
6. STEAM TRACING cont.
STEAM TRACING NOTES cont.
6.
Due to maintaining the required process temperature and because of heat loss, the maximum
tracer length is typically 200 feet. For example, a 500 foot long pipeline, single traced, would
require three tracers (500 + 200 = 2.5 = 3). Each tracer is separately connected to a supply and
return manifold or header.
7.
A separate branch off of a steam supply manifold or header supplies each tracer. Initially, hot
steam is dry but as it cools, it becomes wet or forms condensate. This condensate can be
removed by trapping it to a drain system or to an individual branch on a condensate return
manifold or header. Pre-insulated tubing or jumpers are used between the bare tubing
tracers and both supply and return manifolds or headers.
8.
Due to temperature limitations, copper tubing is typically used up to 400 F and stainless steel
tubing used for higher temperatures. The following table provides the temperatures for
various steam pressure systems:
Steam system
50#
75#
100#
125#
150#
200#
250#
300#
9.
Temp F
298
320
338
353
366
388
406
422
If any equipment and/or instruments require steam tracing, the required footage and tracer
count must be quantified and added into the piping account.
10. The steam-traced line is typically insulated to further improve and maintain the heating
capability of the tubing tracer. The terminations at each end of the jumpers (supply from
steam manifold branch to tracer inlet & return from tracer outlet to condensate manifold
branch) should be accounted for and included in the Insulation account.
11. Other types of tracing systems in the piping account include hot oil, glycol and brine. Electric
tracing required for piping systems is included in the Electrical account.
12. For an all-inclusive work hour unit consisting of tubing (both bare and pre-insulated) and
tubing fittings, for either copper or stainless steel material, inclusive of handling, bending,
cutting and deburring, compression joints and securing to pipeline, use 0.40 WHs/LF.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 40 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
7. COATING & WRAPPING
Pipe
Size
1 & below
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.10
0.13
0.16
0.17
0.19
0.21
0.24
0.27
0.35
0.45
0.53
JOINTS
WHs/EACH
0.11
0.14
0.17
0.24
0.32
0.47
0.64
0.84
1.03
1.24
1.34
1.55
1.77
2.11
2.79
3.20
3.87
FITTINGS
WHs/EACH
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.50
0.60
0.90
1.3
1.7
2.1
2.4
2.6
3.1
3.5
4.2
5.3
6.3
7.4
COATING & WRAPPING NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units represent a standard TGF-3 (Tar, Glass, Felt 3 applications of coal tar
coating) Coal Tar Enamel System consisting of coal tar primer, 2 coats of coal tar enamel,
fiberglass mat, 1 coat of coal tar enamel, felt wrap and kraft paper.
3.
For holiday testing, use 0.04 WHs/LF.
4.
5.
Work hour units for field coating & wrapping are in addition to the work hour units for
handling the pipe. The standard units for Handling Straight Run must be used for the
erection of coated & wrapped pipe.
6.
Other types of coating & wrapping systems include Extruded High Density Polyethylene,
Fusion Bonded Epoxy and Tape Wrap.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 41 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
8. TESTING AND CLEANING
LIQUID DYE PENETRANT
Pipe
Size
3 & below
4 6
8 10
12 14
16 18
20 24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
ALL
OTHER
WELDS
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.6
3.9
4.2
5.1
5.4
6.0
6.9
7.5
8.1
8.7
9.3
BUTT
WELDS
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.4
3.6
4.0
4.6
5.0
5.4
5.8
6.2
LIQUID DYE PENETRANT NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include securing of examination materials, application to examination area
and interpretation of results.
3.
For Reinforced Nozzle Welds, multiply standard units for All Other Welds by 1.25.
4.
5.
For sizes above 72, the work hours are proportional to the largest size.
6.
Liquid Dye Penetrant is typically a subcontract item. These work hours can be used as an
aid for scheduling purposes.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 42 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
8. TESTING AND CLEANING cont.
CHEMICAL CLEANING
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
WHs
PER LF
0.12
0.14
0.15
0.18
0.21
0.25
0.28
0.34
0.39
0.44
0.48
0.50
0.53
0.57
Pipe
Size
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
WHs
PER LF
0.60
0.65
0.73
0.80
0.86
0.92
0.98
1.03
1.08
1.13
1.18
1.22
1.26
CHEMICAL CLEANING NOTES

1.
site.
2.
Work hour units include handling of cleaning materials, flushing lines with chemicals and
distilled water.
3.
There will be a 40-hour minimum for this work.
4.
5.
Chemical Cleaning is typically a subcontract item. These work hours can be used as an aid
for scheduling purposes.
6.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 43 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
9. ALLOY MATERIAL ADJUSTMENTS
MATERIAL CLASSIFICATION GROUPS
LABOR OPERATIONS
BENDS
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
2.75
1.75
1.25
WELDS
1.5
1.75
2.25
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.75
2.25
2.75
LOCAL STRESS RELIEF
1.25
1.25
1.25
---
---
---
---
---
---
GROUP 1
ASTM A335-P1
ASTM A335-P2
ASTM A335-P12
ASTM A335-P11
ASTM A335-P3
.50% Moly
.50-.70% Chrome
.85-1.10% Chrome
1.05-1.45% Chrome
1.50-2.00% Chrome
GROUP 4
Stainless Steels
Types 304, 309, 310, 316, Duplex
(including L & H Grades)
GROUP 2
ASTM A335-P3b
ASTM A335-P22
ASTM A335-P21
ASTM A335-P5.b.c
1.75-2.25% Chrome
2.00-2.50% Chrome
2.75-3.25% Chrome
4.00-6.00% Chrome
GROUP 6
Low Temp Carbon Steel (see Note 5)
ASTM A333 Gr. 1 (see Note 6)
ASTM A333 Gr. 4
ASTM A333 Gr. 9 (see Note 6)
GROUP 3
ASTM A335-P7
ASTM A335-P9
Ferritic Chromes
ASTM A333 Gr. 3
6.00-8.00% Chrome
8.00-10.00% Chrome
10.00-15.00% Chrome
3.50% Nickel
GROUP 7
Hastelloy
Titanium
99% Nickel
GROUP 5
Copper and Brass
GROUP 8
Stainless Steels Types 317, 321, 347
Copper-Nickel
Monel
Inconel
Incoloy
Alloy 20
HF Modified
GROUP 9
Aluminum
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 44 of 62

B. STEEL PIPE cont.
9. ALLOY MATERIAL ADJUSTMENTS cont.
ALLOY MATERIAL ADJUSTMENT NOTES
1.
Apply the appropriate multiplier above to the corresponding Carbon Steel labor operation.
2.
Adjustments shown above apply to all wall thicknesses.
3.
The molybdenum content in alloys listed in Groups 1 through 3 inclusive, shall not exceed 1%.
4.
Adjustments for alloys other than those listed above will have to be researched. Consult Piping lead engineer.
5.
Low Temp Carbon Steel type ASTM A333 Gr. 6 is standard Carbon Steel material and alloy adjustments do not apply.
6.
Where standard Carbon Steel welding procedures and filler metal can be used, alloy adjustments will not apply to Low Temp Carbon Steel
types ASTM A333 Gr. 1 and ASTM A333 Gr. 9. Consult Piping lead engineer.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 45 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE
10. CAST/DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPE
Pipe
Size
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
11.4
14.4
22.2
31.3
40.8
51.1
63.4
73.9
84.9
96.3
120.2
163.8
223.6
333.6
432.9
550.7
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.33
0.39
0.49
0.55
0.64
0.68
0.75
0.82
0.86
0.93
1.03
1.27
1.44
1.73
1.89
2.10
BELL & SPIGOT

PUSH-ON
GASKET
MECHANICAL
JOINT
JOINT
WHs/EA
WHs/EA
0.50
0.90
0.70
1.10
1.05
1.70
1.40
1.90
1.75
2.45
2.05
2.65
2.40
3.20
2.75
3.75
3.10
3.95
3.45
4.50
4.15
5.25
5.15
7.80
6.20
9.30
7.25
12.60
8.25
14.35
9.30
---
CUTS
INTO
MAINS
WHs/EA
12
17
22
28
33
38
47
56
63
70
84
105
---------
CAST/DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
Work hour units for pipe are for erection only and do not include joint make-up.
3.
Work hour units for joints include handling, cutting, and joint make-on.
4.
Cast/Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe typically comes in 20-foot lengths.
5.
If polyethylene encasement is required, use the following unit work hours:

3 through 12
14 through 24
30 through 54
0.10 WHs/LF
0.15 WHs/LF
0.20 WHs/LF
6.
Weight per foot of pipe varies within each size by wall thickness as defined by ANSI
Thickness Classifications (50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55 or 56). The pipe weight per LF above is
classification 53.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 46 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
11. CAST IRON SOIL PIPE
Pipe
Size
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
15
Pipe
Size
2
3
4
6
8
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
2.7
3.6
5.2
7.4
11.0
18.0
25.8
32.6
48.4
FLOOR & ROOF
DRAINS
WHs/EA
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.23
0.24
0.27
0.30
0.38
0.44
0.55
0.62
0.70
NO-HUB
CLAMP
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.58
0.60
0.68
0.75
0.95
1.10
1.38
-----
HUB & SPIGOT

COMPRESSION
GASKET
JOINT
WHs/EA
--0.65
0.75
0.83
1.00
1.17
1.58
1.90
2.30
CLEAN-OUTS
WHs/EA
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
4.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe typically comes in 5 and 10-foot lengths.
5.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe is classified into two major types hub & spigot and hubless (No Hub).
Hubless cast iron soil pipe is made in only one class or thickness, ranging in size from 1
to 10. Hub & Spigot cast iron soil pipe is available in two classes or thicknesses Service
(SV) and Extra Heavy (XH), ranging in size from 2 to 15. Because the additional wall
thickness is added to the outside diameter of the Extra Heavy (XH), it and the Service (SV)
pipe have different O.D.s and are not readily interchangeable. The Hubless and Service
(SV) pipe weigh about the same. The pipe weight per LF above is Service (SV)/No-Hub.
6.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 47 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
12. CONCRETE PIPE
NON-REINFORCED (ASTM C-14)
BELL & SPIGOT
Pipe
Size
4
6
8
10
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
8.0
25.0
35.0
48.0
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.45
0.57
0.66
0.75
RUBBER
GASKET
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.70
0.90
1.20
1.50
MORTAR
JOINT
WHs/EA
1.15
1.35
1.57
1.77
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.73
0.82
0.90
0.98
1.05
1.12
1.18
1.25
1.31
1.36
1.42
1.47
1.53
1.58
1.63
1.72
1.82
1.91
1.99
2.08
2.16
2.24
BELL &
SPIGOT
RUBBER
GASKET
JOINT
WHs/EA
1.70
2.10
2.50
2.95
3.35
3.80
4.20
4.60
5.05
5.45
5.90
6.30
6.70
7.15
7.55
8.40
9.25
10.10
10.90
11.75
12.60
13.45
TONGUE &
GROOVE
MORTAR
JOINT
WHs/EA
2.35
2.80
3.35
3.95
4.50
5.15
5.70
6.20
6.80
7.35
8.00
8.50
9.05
9.65
10.20
11.35
12.50
13.65
14.70
15.90
17.00
18.20
REINFORCED (ASTM C-76, CLASS III)
Pipe
Size
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
101
138
178
228
282
343
406
481
559
701
786
876
972
1,073
1,323
1,569
1,837
2,158
2,452
2,807
3,170
3,562
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 48 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
12. CONCRETE PIPE cont.
CONCRETE PIPE NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete Pipe typically comes in the following lengths.

Non-Reinforced:
4 & 6
3-foot
8 & 10
4-foot
Reinforced:
12 & 15
18 & larger
6.
6-foot
7 -foot
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 49 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
13. COPPER PIPE
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
0.34
0.64
0.84
1.36
2.06
4.00
6.51
13.9
25.9
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.26
0.31
0.41
0.48
0.72
1.00
SOLDER
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.26
0.32
0.37
0.45
0.50
0.93
1.22
1.60
2.10
COPPER PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
Work hour units for joints include handling, cutting, deburring and soldering.
4.
5.
Copper Pipe is available in seven types, according to ASTM standards: K, L, M, DWV

(Drain, Waste and Vent), Medical Gas, ACR (Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
Services) and G (Natural Gas and Propane Fuel Distribution). Each type represents a series
of sizes with different wall thicknesses. Type K has thicker walls than Type L, and Type L
walls are thicker than Type M, for any given diameter. The pipe weight per LF above is
Type K. Types K, L and M are available in diameters up through 12.
6.
The selection of solder depends primarily on the operating pressure and temperature of the
system. The 50-50 tin-lead solder is suitable for moderate pressures and temperatures. For
higher pressures, or where greater joint strength is required, 95-5 tin-antimony solder can
be used. For continuous operation at temperatures exceeding 250F or where the highest
joint strength is required, brazing filler metals should be used.
7.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 50 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
14. CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
Pipe
Size
8
10
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
36
42
48
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
14.4
18.0
21.6
27.0
32.4
37.8
43.2
48.6
54.0
64.8
75.6
86.4
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.32
0.42
0.45
0.49
0.51
0.58
0.64
0.77
0.83
1.22
1.28
1.46
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
Corrugated Metal Pipe is produced from uncoated steel, galvanized steel, or aluminum
coiled strip ranging from 18 gauge (0.0472) thick by 12 wide to 8 gauge (0.1654) thick
by 36 wide. Pipe diameters range from to 12-0. The pipe weight per LF above is
based on 8 gauge (6.875 pounds per square foot). This pipe is used for such applications as
water drainage, flood control, storm sewers, concrete piling shells and culverts.
3.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 51 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
15. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
Pipe
Size
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
0.42
0.92
1.52
3.29
5.57
8.65
12.17
14.68
19.17
24.26
29.96
43.14
67.40
97.06
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.18
0.24
0.31
0.35
0.39
0.44
0.55
0.66
0.94
1.46
2.06
BUTT
FUSION
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.50
1.20
1.60
2.35
3.15
4.00
4.90
5.80
6.80
7.80
9.00
10.50
13.00
16.00
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
Work hour units for joints include handling, cutting, heating and butt-fusion.
4.
5.
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe is available in various Standard Dimension Ratio
(SDR) classifications. Each SDR has its own pressure rating identification. The SDR system
is a specific ratio of the nominal outside diameter to the minimum specified wall thickness.
The nine basic classifications are SDR 7 (265 psi); SDR 9 (200 psi); SDR 11 (160 psi);
SDR 13.5 (130 psi); SDR 15.5 (110 psi); SDR 17 (100 psi); SDR 21 (80 psi); SDR 26 (65
psi); and SDR 32.5 (50 psi). Each classification represents a series of sizes with different
wall thicknesses. SDR 7 has thicker walls than SDR 9, SDR 9 walls are thicker than SDR
11, and so on, for any given diameter. The pipe weight per LF above is SDR 17.
6.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 52 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
16. POLYPROPYLENE PIPE
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
0.08
0.12
0.17
0.40
0.63
1.28
1.91
4.04
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.11
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.23
0.27
0.37
THREADED
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.33
0.40
0.68
0.93
-----
THERMOSEAL
FUSION
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.58
0.72
0.90
1.11
1.25
1.62
2.40
2.70
POLYPROPYLENE PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
Work hour units for threaded joints include handling, cutting, threading and joint make-on.
4.
Work hour units for fusion joints include handling, cutting, heating and thermo-seal fusion.
5.
Threaded joints are not recommended above 4 in diameter.
6.
When joining 6 polypropylene fusion systems, a fillet welding procedure is utilized.
7.
Polypropylene Pipe is a polyolefin that is lightweight and generally high in chemical

resistance. Its recommended temperature range is 0 to 200 F and is available in two
Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) classifications. Each SDR has its own pressure rating
identification. The SDR system is a specific ratio of the nominal outside diameter to the
minimum specified wall thickness. The two classifications are SDR 11 (160 psi) and SDR
32.5 (50 psi). Each classification represents a series of sizes with different wall thicknesses.
SDR 11 has thicker walls than SDR 32.5, for any given diameter. The pipe weight per LF
above is SDR 11.
8.
Poly VinyliDene Fluoride (PVDF), more commonly referred to as KYNAR, is a strong,

tough and abrasive resistant fluorocarbon material. Its recommended temperature range is
-40 to 320 F. Its weight per LF can vary higher than polypropylene but the work hour
units above will apply to this material also.
9.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 53 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
17. POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
0.21
0.28
0.41
0.69
0.96
1.95
2.84
5.43
8.25
12.24
16.83
19.96
25.55
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.13
0.14
0.16
0.19
0.22
0.28
0.33
0.47
0.65
0.89
1.11
1.50
2.03
THREADED
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.33
0.40
0.68
0.93
-------------------------
SOLVENT
CEMENT
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.26
0.32
0.41
0.51
0.63
0.79
0.99
1.24
1.89
2.86
4.34
6.57
9.96
POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
Work hour units for threaded joints include handling, cutting, threading and joint make-on.
4.
Work hour units for solvent cement joints include handling, cutting and joint make-on.
5.
Threaded joints are not recommended above 4 in diameter.
6.
Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe is characterized by high physical properties and resistance
to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalis, salt solutions and many other chemicals.
It is attacked, however, by polar solvents such as ketones, some chlorinated hydrocarbons
and aromatics. The maximum service temperature is 140 F and is available in either
schedule 40 or 80. Each classification represents a series of sizes with different wall
thicknesses. The pipe weight per LF above is S/80.
7.
Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) is similar to PVC with chemical resistance the
same or generally better. The maximum service temperature of CPVC is 210 F. Its weight
per LF can vary slightly higher than PVC but the work hour units above will apply to this
material also.
8.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 54 of 62

C. OTHER PIPE cont.
18. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
Pipe
Weight
Per LF
0.71
0.99
1.27
1.84
2.40
4.46
7.10
10.33
14.14
21.03
26.34
32.23
38.71
57.11
84.44
122.54
167.71
219.95
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.12
0.15
0.18
0.22
0.25
0.35
0.47
0.62
0.75
0.80
0.95
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.90
3.60
5.00
6.40
EPOXY
CEMENT
SOCKET
JOINT
WHs/EA
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.90
1.20
1.90
2.75
3.95
5.20
-------------------
BUTT
WRAP
JOINT
WHs/EA
------------------5.50
6.65
8.05
9.50
11.00
13.00
15.50
20.00
28.50
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE NOTES

1.
2.
3.
Work hour units for epoxy cement joints include handling, cutting and joint make-on.
4.
Work hour units for butt wrap joints include handling, cutting and glass matte overlay.
5.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe is manufactured in a resin matrix reinforced with
glass fibers. The resin systems vary from isophthalic polyesters and epoxy vinyl esters to
specialty resins for custom applications. The glass reinforcement includes filament rovings
and unidirectional and bi-directional woven products. Applications are varied across a wide
range of services from mild sea water to heavy duty chemicals, at temperatures up to 250 F
and pressures up to 200psig (13.8 bar). FRP pipe is available in either lightweight or extraheavy wall. Each classification represents a series of sizes with different wall thicknesses.
The pipe weight per LF above is extra-heavy.
6.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 55 of 62

D. BOLT-UPS
WHs PER FLANGE

FLANGE RATINGS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
150#
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.7
1.7
2.0
2.6
2.9
3.7
4.1
5.7
7.9
8.9
10.9
12.7
15.0
300#
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.7
2.6
2.9
3.7
4.1
4.9
4.9
5.9
8.1
10.6
11.9
13.2
16.9
19.9
600#
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.1
2.0
2.2
3.3
4.1
4.5
5.0
5.4
6.5
7.4
9.2
11.8
14.2
15.7
20.1
23.7
900#
----------1.1
1.5
2.2
2.7
3.6
4.5
5.0
5.4
6.2
6.6
8.4
10.1
12.8
15.5
17.2
-----
1500#
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.1
1.5
1.6
2.4
3.2
3.7
5.3
6.0
6.7
7.4
8.1
9.4
-------------
2500#
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.6
4.0
5.0
5.6
-----------------------
BOLT-UP NOTES
1.
Work hour units include handling of equipment, set-up, operation and disassemble, at
erection site.
2.
Work hour units include installation of gasket.
3.
Work hour units for 30 and larger flanges are based on MSS SP-44.
4.
In 900# flange rated systems, through 2 flanges are always increased to 1500#.
5.
For Ring Type Joint (RTJ) flange bolt-ups, multiply standard units by 1.2.
6.
For Orifice Flange Sets, multiply standard units by 2.0.
7.
For bolt-ups to an existing flange or equipment nozzle, multiply standard units by 2.0.
8.
For unbolting, multiply standard units by 50% if piping will be disposed of or use net if
piping will be reinstalled (remember to use units again for the reinstallation).
9.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 56 of 62

E. VALVE HANDLING
WHs/EACH
SCREWED & SOCKETWELD ENDS

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
All
Ratings
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.7
BUTTWELD ENDS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
150#
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.3
2.5
3.7
5.6
6.9
9.3
9.9
12.0
13.4
14.8
19.2
30
44
300#
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.7
1.6
2.5
4.0
6.9
7.9
10.0
11.4
11.7
17.6
19.2
25
36
44
64
600#
0.4
0.6
0.6
0.9
1.9
3.9
5.7
9.5
10.6
13.6
16.7
22
28
39
45
61
-----
900#
----------4.4
6.9
10.2
12.0
15.4
20
---------------
1500#
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.7
2.0
4.9
8.1
10.8
13.4
17.2
24
---------------
2500#
0.9
1.1
1.3
2.0
2.3
5.6
9.5
12.5
15.5
20
26
---------------
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 57 of 62

E. VALVE HANDLING cont.
WHs/EACH
FLANGED ENDS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
150#
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.4
1.9
2.6
5.3
6.9
9.4
11.5
12.5
15.6
17.6
20
25
37
54
300#
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.6
3.0
4.2
5.5
8.9
10.2
13.9
15.8
17.6
24
27
31
43
54
77
600#
1.2
1.4
1.6
2.0
3.2
5.4
7.2
12.2
13.6
18.3
23
28
34
45
52
67
-----
300#
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.6
1.4
2.2
3.5
6.0
6.8
8.7
9.9
10.2
15.3
16.7
21
31
38
56
600#
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.6
3.4
4.9
8.3
9.2
11.8
14.5
19.4
24
34
39
53
-----
900#
----------6.5
10.1
12.6
17.1
21
29
38
44
-----------
1500#
1.8
2.1
2.4
3.2
4.6
8.3
11.9
15.6
21
26
36
---------------
2500#
2.0
2.2
2.6
3.7
5.3
9.4
14.1
17.1
25
32
39
---------------
BOLT-THROUGH TYPE
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
150#
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.1
2.0
3.3
4.9
6.0
8.1
8.6
10.4
11.7
12.9
16.7
26
38
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 58 of 62

WHs/EACH
PRESSURE SAFETY (PSV) / CONTROL (CV) VALVES

Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
150#
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.5
2.1
2.9
3.9
7.9
10.3
14.1
17.3
18.8
23
26
30
37
300#
1.3
1.8
1.8
2.5
4.5
6.3
8.3
13.4
15.4
21
24
26
35
40
47
65
VALVE HANDLING NOTES

1.
2.
Work hour units for Screwed & Socketweld End valves are for handling only and do not
include the required screwed joints or socketwelds. See section B.2, Steel Pipe Screwed
Joints and Socketwelds for applicable unit work hours.
3.
Work hour units for Buttweld End valves are for handling only and do not include the
required buttweld. See section B.3, Steel Pipe Welds, Buttwelds for applicable unit work
hours. If material is alloy, see section B.9, Steel Pipe Alloy Material Adjustments for
applicable adjustment factor.
4.
Work hour units for Flanged End valves include handling and applicable time for mating
valve flange to line flange; to equipment nozzle; or to another valve flange. For applicable
line flange unit work hours, see section D. Bolt-ups.
5.
Work hour units for Bolt-Through Type valves are for handling only and do not include the
required mating flange bolt-ups. See section D., Bolt-ups for applicable unit work hours.
6.
Work hour units for Pressure Safety (PSV) / Control (CV) Valves include handling and
applicable time for mating valve flange to line flange; to equipment nozzle; or to another
valve flange. For applicable line flange unit work hours, see section D. Bolt-ups.
7.
If Pressure Safety Valves (PSVs) are fit-up and removed for hydrotest, then reinstalled,
multiply standard units by 2.75.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 59 of 62

VALVE HANDLING NOTES cont.
8.
For Diaphragm valves, Mechanical Joint valves or Motor Operated (MOVs) Valves,
multiply Flanged End standard units by 1.5.
9.
Work hour units for 30 and larger flanged valves are based on MSS SP-44 flanges.
10. In 900# flange rated systems, through 2 flanges are always increased to 1500#.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 60 of 62

F. SPECIALTIES
For the following items with screwed or socketweld end connections, see section E. Valve Handling
Screwed & Socketweld Ends for applicable unit work hours:
ITEM
Backflow Preventer
with double check valve in one body
with double check valve in two separate bodies
with double check valve in one body and two shut-off valves

and two shut-off valves
Exhaust Head
Flame Arrestor
Flexible Hoses
Separator
Spray Nozzle
Sprinkler Nozzle
Steam Trap
Y-Strainer
WHs/EA
Net
Multiply standard unit by 2.0
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
For the following items with flanged or buttweld end connections, see section E. Valve Handling
Buttweld Ends or Flanged Ends for applicable unit work hours:
ITEM
Backflow Preventer
with double check valve in one body
with double check valve in one body and two shut-off valves

and two shut-off valves
Exhaust Head
Expansion Joint
Flame Arrestor
Flexible Hoses
Hammer Blind
Separator
Steam Trap
Tee Strainer
Y-Strainer
WHs/EA
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
Net
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 61 of 62

F. SPECIALTIES cont.
Miscellaneous
ITEM
Spectacle (line) Blind
WHs/EA
Use flanged valve hours for same flange rating
Sample Cooler
10.0
Safety Eye Wash / Eye-Face Wash Combo

10.0
Safety Shower / Shower-Eye Wash Combo
20.0
if any safety item requires complete enclosure, multiply standard unit by 2.0
Fire Protection Equipment
Fire Extinguishers all sizes
Fire Hydrant
Fire Hydrant/Monitor Combo
Fire Monitor
Hose Cabinets at grade
Hose Cabinets elevated
Hose Rack
Hose Reel
Indicator Post
2.0
10.0
20.0
15.0
3.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
6.0
Valve Box
to 10 valve
12 & above
5.0
10.0
Manholes and Catch Basins Precast Concrete with Frame & Cover or with Frame & Grate
Depth
4-0
5-0
6-0
7-0
8-0
9-0
10-0
12-0
14-0
36
15
17
19
21
23
25
28
33
38
Inside Diameter
48
60
19
26
22
30
25
35
28
40
31
45
35
50
39
55
46
65
53
76
72
39
46
53
60
67
74
81
96
111
Work hour units do not include excavation, installation of base or grouting of frames.
000 310 1500

April 2000
Page 62 of 62

F. SPECIALTIES cont.
SPECIALTY NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units are for handling only and do not include the required joint connections.
See the appropriate section for applicable unit work hours.
3.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 1 of 132
ELECTRICAL UNIT WORK HOURS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. GENERAL NOTES
Page 3
B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1. TRANSFORMERS
2. SWITCHGEAR
3. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC)
4. MOTOR STARTERS
5. PANELBOARD
6. DISCONNECT
7. BUS DUCT
8. SUBSTATION COMPONENTS
9. GENERATORS
10. UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
Page 4
Page 8
Page 12
Page 14
Page 16
Page 20
Page 21
Page 24
Page 33
Page 35
C. POWER FEEDERS AND MOTOR RUNS

11. CONDUIT, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES
12. CABLE TRAY
13. WIRE & CABLE
14. CABLE TESTING
15. TERMINATION KITS
16. SPLICE KITS
17. CABLE TERMINATOR
18. ENCLOSURES
Page 36
Page 51
Page 54
Page 74
Page 75
Page 77
Page 78
Page 79
D. LIGHTING
19. FIXTURES
20. POLES, BRACKETS & MISC
21. WIRING DEVICES
22. EMERGENCY & EXIT LIGHTING
23. BOLLARD & LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
Page 83
Page 85
Page 86
Page 88
Page 89
E. GROUNDING
Page 90
F. INSTRUMENT WIRING
Page 91
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 2 of 132

G. COMMUNICATIONS
24. FIBER OPTICS
25. UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE
26. TELEPHONE EXCHANGE CABLE
27. SHIELDED (COAXIAL) CABLE
28. COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
29. SURVELLIENCE EQUIPMENT
30. TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
31. ACCESS CONTROL
32. INDUSTRIAL FACILITY PAGE/PARTY
33. LOCAL BUILDING PAGING SYSTEMS
34. MISCELLANEOUS
Page 96
Page 97
Page 98
Page 99
Page 100
Page 101
Page 103
Page 104
Page 106
Page 107
Page 108
H. POLE LINE
Page 109
I. ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING
Page 114
J. CATHODIC PROTECTION
Page 117
K. METRIC CONVERSIONS
Page 131
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 3 of 132

A. GENERAL NOTES
1.
For applicable installation details, see Fluor Daniel Standard Assemblies.
2.
For any excavation, backfill or concrete activities, see appropriate sections:
3.
000 310 1000

000 310 1100
Earthwork Standard Unit Work hours

Concrete Standard Unit Work hours
Voltage categories, per National Electric Code (NEC):
Low Voltage
Medium Voltage
High Voltage
600V and below

> 600V and < 35KV
35KV and above
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 4 of 132

B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1. TRANSFORMERS
DRY TYPE - SINGLE PHASE
KVA
.250
.500
.750
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
167
250
480 V PRIMARY
WT. LBS.
WHs
13
3
13
3
20
3
26
4
36
5
40
5
64
6
75
6
114
7
142
8
158
10
252
12
320
15
388
17
530
20
638
24
1,140
32
1,350
32
4160 V PRIMARY
WT. LBS.
WHs
---------------------------------280
14
360
17
430
19
590
22
730
26
1,140
34
1,530
36
DRY TYPE - THREE PHASE

KVA
3
6
9
15
30
45
75
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
480 V PRIMARY
WT. LBS.
WHs
60
6
110
7
140
9
209
11
380
15
500
20
650
22
850
26
950
30
1,250
40
1,500
45
2,700
60
3,700
75
4160 V PRIMARY
WT. LBS.
WHs
------------500
20
600
26
800
30
950
34
1,250
44
1,500
48
1,750
52
2,750
79
3,800
94
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 5 of 132

B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT cont.
1. TRANSFORMERS cont.
OIL FILLED - SINGLE PHASE
PRIMARY VOLTS 4160/2400, 12470/7200 & 13200/7620
KVA
10
15
25
37.5
50
75
100
167
WT. LBS.
1,000
1,000
1,100
1,250
1,350
1,800
1,900
2,100
WHs
28
28
28
32
34
38
50
50
OIL FILLED - THREE PHASE

PRIMARY VOLTS 15 KV AND BELOW
KVA
30
45
75
112.5
150
225
300
500
WT. LBS.
1,200
1,500
1,800
2,800
3,000
3,480
4,000
6,300
WHs
36
36
44
75
75
82
90
110
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 6 of 132

LIQUID IMMERSED SUB-STATION TYPE - THREE PHASE
OA/FUT. FA OR OA/FA
KVA
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3750
5000
7500
10,000
12,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
40,000
WT. LBS
WITH OIL
6,300
7,500
8,000
10,200
12,000
13,400
18,800
27,000
31,000
44,000
50,000
79,500
91,900
102,000
120,300
138,500
170,500
WHs
110
110
110
140
140
140
160
200
200
250
250
265
285
295
315
330
360
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 7 of 132

TRANSFORMER NOTES
1.
2.
All work hour units represent outdoor installation. For indoor applications, make
adjustments as necessary per specific project.
3.
Any supports required are not included.
4.
For field installation of oil:
Drum Loading use 1.5 WH/Drum (1 drum = 55 gallons or 390 pounds)
Tank Car Loading use 0.014 WH/Gallon
5.
For field installation of high voltage bushings, radiators, fans, etc., add 50% to the
standard units. If some items are shipped attached to transformer, adjust percentage
accordingly.
6.
If transformer is shipped with oil, without high voltage bushings, radiators, fans, etc., an
additional 7% must be added to standard units for topping of oil in the field.
7.
If transformer is shipped complete with oil and components attached, use standard units as
shown.
8.
For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, NECA or
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 8 of 132

2. SWITCHGEAR
OUTDOOR & INDOOR SWITCHGEAR, METAL-CLAD
SYSTEM
KV
INTERRUPTING
MVA
MAXIMUM
CURRENT
WHs
AUXILIARY
METERING
SECTION
WHs
150
250
250
500
680
850
450 AMPS
450 AMPS
200 AMPS
175 AMPS
1200 AMPS
1600 AMPS
46
46
60
70
85
100
32
40
35
48
60
75
125
125
125
300
680
850
450 AMPS
450 AMPS
200 AMPS
175 AMPS
1200 AMPS
1600 AMPS
40
40
50
60
75
90
-------
ROLLOUT TYPE
2.4
4.16 to 4.8
7.2
13.8
35
69
STATIONARY TYPE
2.4
4.16 to 4.8
7.2
13.8
35
69
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 9 of 132

2. SWITCHGEAR cont.
INTEGRAL LOAD CENTER UNIT SUBSTATIONS
5KV
WHs
17
21
21
17
21
26
INCOMING LINE COMPARTMENT

Air Switch
Oil Filled Switch
Oil Fused Cutout
Terminal Compression/Clamp Type
Potheads 1 3/C
Potheads 2 3/C
15KV
WHs
20
24
24
20
24
29
TRANSFORMER SECTION (15KV AND BELOW)

KVA
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
2500
DRY TYPE WHs

34
44
48
52
79
94
98
125
132
132
OIL FILLED WHs

75
75
82
90
110
110
110
140
140
140
OUTGOING COMPARTMENT
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
AMP RATING
225
600
1600
3000
4000
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
Basic Compartment
100 AMP Circuit Breaker
WHs
12
12
24
42
60
WHs
16
2
3
3
4
6
8
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 10 of 132

2. SWITCHGEAR cont.
INSTALL IN PLACE
Per Vertical Section
600V
WHs
15
5KV
WHs
20
15KV
WHs
30
ADD FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSIBLE SWITCH:

AMP
225
600
800
1200
1600
2000
3000
4000
6000
600V
WHs
5
6
11
12
14
16
20
26
32
ADD FOR AIR OR ELECTRICALLY OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER:

AMP
225
600
800
1200
1600
2000
3000
4000
6000
600V
WHs
5
6
10
12
12
16
26
30
--
5KV
WHs
-8
12
14
14
18
26
34
36
15KV
WHs
--14
16
18
20
30
34
36
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 11 of 132

2. SWITCHGEAR cont.
SWITCHGEAR NOTES
1.
2.
All work hour units represent indoor installation. For outdoor applications, make the
following adjustments:
For walk in type, add 12 WHs per vertical section
For non-walk in type, add 8 WHs per vertical section
Add guard posts as required
3.
4.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 12 of 132

3. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCCs)
480 VOLT 3 PHASE NEMA CLASS 1
INSTALL IN PLACE
Per Vertical Section
WHs
15
ADDERS:
Size 1
HP
thru
10 HP
Motors
Size 2
15 HP
thru
25 HP
Motors
Size 3
30 HP
thru
50 HP
Motors
Size 4
60 HP
thru
100 HP
Motors
Size 5
125 HP
thru
200 HP
Motors
Size 6
200 HP
thru
400 HP
Motors
For combination magnetic

starters (FVNR*) single speed:
For combination magnetic

starters (FVNR*) two speed:
--
For reduced voltage, autotransformer (combination):
--
For full voltage reversing

starters, single speed:
For addition of starters

to existing MCCs:
--
For starter hardware

to existing MCCs:
--
100
AMP
3 Pole
225
AMP
3 Pole
400
AMP
3 Pole
600
AMP
3 Pole
800
AMP
3 Pole
1200
AMP
3 Pole
For incoming line and feeder

breakers and/or fused switches
*FVNR = Full Voltage Non-Reversing
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 13 of 132

3. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCCs) cont.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE 3 PHASE 3 WIRE NEMA CLASS 1
FULLY FACTORY ASSEMBLED UNITS

Single Vertical Sections
Double Vertical Sections
2400
VOLT
WHs
20
24
4800
VOLT
WHs
25
30
ADD FOR STARTERS

200 thru 400 HP
500 thru 1250 HP
1500 thru 2500 HP
WHs
8
12
18
WHs
12
16
24
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER NOTES

1.
2.
For bolting section together, if required, add 1 WH per section.
3.
For checkout and tighten internal connections, if required, add 1 WH per section.
4.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 14 of 132

4. MOTOR STARTERS
600V ENCLOSED NEMA 1 AND 3R
HP
Up to 2
3-5
7.5-10
15-25
30-50
60-75
100
200
NEMA
SIZE
00
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
MANUAL
2
3
4
5
-----
MAGNETIC
NONREVERSING
3
4
5
7
9
12
15
20
MAGNETIC
REVERSING
5
6
7
9
12
14
18
24
600V ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC

With Circuit Breaker or Switch
HP
Up to 2
3-5
7.5-10
15-25
30-50
60-75
100
200
NEMA
SIZE
00
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
NEMA 1 & 3R
NONREV
REV
4
6
5
7
6
8
10
12
12
14
14
16
18
21
24
28
EXPLOSION PROOF
NONREV
REV
6
8
6
8
8
10
11
13
16
19
19
21
24
28
32
37
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

HP
3-5
7.5-10
15-20
25-40
50
60-75
100-150
200
NEMA
SIZE
0
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
STANDARD
NEMA 1
10
12
18
24
30
36
40
48
CUSTOM
ENGINEERED
14
17
26
34
43
51
57
69
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 15 of 132

C. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT cont.
4. MOTOR STARTERS cont.
MOTOR STARTER NOTES
1.
2.
3.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 16 of 132

5. PANELBOARD
120/240 VOLT SURFACE OR FLUSH MOUNTED
15-30 AMP Single Pole Branch Circuit Breakers
Unassembled Panels
With Main Circuit Breaker or Main Lug Only
BREAKERS
8
12
16
20
22
24
30
32
36
42
SINGLE PHASE 3 WIRE

100 AMP
200 AMP
5
-7
-10
-12
--13
---18
-19
-21
-25
277/480 VOLT SURFACE OR FLUSH MOUNTED

15-30 AMP Single Pole Branch Circuit Breakers
Unassembled Panels
With Main Circuit Breaker or Main Lug Only
BREAKERS
8
12
16
20
22
24
30
32
36
42
THREE PHASE 4 WIRE

125 AMP
225 AMP
7
-10
-12
-15
-17
-19
-22
--24
-26
-30
MOUNTING BRACKET
8-16 Circuit Panelboard
WHs
2
3
4
THREE PHASE 4 WIRE

100 AMP
200 AMP
5
-8
-10
---14
-17
--20
-21
-24
-27
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 17 of 132

5. PANELBOARD cont.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS SURFACE MOUNTED
600-Volt, Three Phase
MAIN
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
9
11
17
22
28
33
AMP
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
MAIN
LUG
ONLY
8
10
15
20
25
30
ADD FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKER

AMP
15-60
70-100
110-225
250-400
450-600
700-800
ONE
POLE
0.5
0.7
-----
TWO
POLE
0.8
1.5
2
3
5
6
THREE
POLE
1
2
3
4
6
7
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 18 of 132

5. PANELBOARD cont.
NON-HAZERDOUS AREA PANELS - NEMA 3, 4, 5
Single phase 3 Wire Solid/Neutral 120/240 Volt
Three Phase 4 Wire Solid Neutral 120/208 Volt
Preassembled Panels
Main Breaker Not Included
NUMBER OF CIRCUITS
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
30
42
WHs
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
12
13
14
15
17
20
24
ADD FOR MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

AMP
100
150
200
225
WHs
2
2
2
2
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 19 of 132

5. PANELBOARD cont.
HAZERDOUS AREA PANELS - CLASS 1, DIVISION I & II
Single Phase 3 Wire Solid/Neutral 120/240 Volt
Three Phase 4 Wire Solid Neutral 120/208 Volt
Preassembled Panels
Main Breaker Not Included
NUMBER OF CIRCUITS
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
WHs
8
9
10
12
13
15
17
19
20
22
ADD FOR MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

AMP
100
150
200
225
WHs
3
3
4
4
PANELBOARD NOTES
1.
2.
All work hour units represent NEMA 1 classification, unless otherwise noted.
3.
4.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 20 of 132

6. DISCONNECT
600V ENCLOSED NEMA 1 AND 3R
AMP
Up to 60
Up to 150
200
225
250
400
600
800
1200
SAFETY
SWITCH
4
6
8
9
10
12
20
25
30
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
4
7
9
10
12
15
22
26
34
600V ENCLOSED NEMA 7

AMP
30
40
50
60
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
400
SAFETY
SWITCH
4
--5
--6
-8
-9
-----
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
15
18
21
DISCONNECT NOTES
1.
2.
3.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 21 of 132

7. BUS DUCT
THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER TO SWITCHGEAR
AMP
600V
WHs
4.16KV 13.8KV 34.5KV

WHs WHs WHs
Bus Duct Per Foot
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.8
2.1
0.8
0.9
1
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.2
0.9
1
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8
2
2.4
1
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.6
3
Elbow 90 Degree
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
6.4
7.6
9.2
11.2
13.6
16.8
4.4
4.9
5.3
5.8
6.2
7
8.4
10.2
12.3
15
18.5
4.9
5.4
5.8
6.3
6.8
7.8
9.3
11.1
13.5
16.5
20.3
6.3
7
7.6
8.2
8.9
10
12.1
14.5
17.6
21.4
26.4
Transformer Connection 600

800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
6.4
7.6
8.8
11.2
13.6
16.8
4.4
4.9
5.3
5.8
6.2
7.1
8.4
9.7
12.3
15
18.5
4.9
5.4
5.8
6.3
6.8
7.8
9.3
10.6
13.5
16.5
20.3
6.3
7
7.6
8.2
8.9
10.2
12.1
13.8
17.6
21.4
26.4
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 22 of 132

7. BUS DUCT cont.
THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER TO SWITCHGEAR cont.
AMP
600V
WHs
4.16KV 13.8KV 34.5KV

WHs WHs WHs
Switchgear Connection
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
2
2.4
2.8
3.2
3.6
4
4.4
4.8
5.6
8
9.6
2.2
2.6
3.1
3.5
4
4.4
4.9
5.3
6.2
8.8
10.6
2.5
2.9
3.4
3.8
4.4
4.9
5.4
5.8
6.8
9.7
11.6
3.2
3.8
4.5
5
5.8
6.3
7
7.6
8.9
12.6
15.1
Wall Flanges (Set)
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.2
3.8
4.4
5.6
6.8
8.4
2.2
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.6
4.2
4.9
6.2
7.5
9.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.2
3.4
3.9
4.7
5.3
6.8
8.3
10.2
3.2
3.5
3.8
4.1
4.5
5.1
6.1
6.9
8.8
10.7
13.2
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 23 of 132

7. BUS DUCT cont.
PLUG-IN
100 AMP
Aluminum or Copper
1 Phase, 3 Wire & Ground, 120/240 Volt (per LF)
3 Phase, 3 Wire & Ground, 600 Volt Max (per LF)
3 Phase, 4 Wire & Ground, 277/480 Volt (per LF)
Outlet Cover
End Closure
Wall Flange
Hangers and Supports (including clamp, rod, nuts, etc.)
Elbows
Tees
Cable Tap Box
WHs
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.20
0.50
0.50
1.25
1.50
1.75
3.00
CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE

ONE
POLE
1
1.5
AMP
15-60
70-100
TWO
POLE
1.5
2.3
THREE
POLE
2.2
3.2
FUSIBLE UNIT
480/277 VOLT
3 PHASE, 4 WIRE
1.6
2.7
4
5.8
10.5
15
19.5
24
28.5
33
AMP
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
600 VOLT
3 PHASE, 3 WIRE
1.4
2.2
3.2
4.5
8
12
16
20
24
28
BUS DUCT NOTES

1.
2.
3.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 24 of 132

8. SUBSTATION COMPONENTS
LINE TRAP
AMP
400
800
1200
1600
2000
3000
SIZE
DIAMETER
LENGTH
22
51
28
57
34
63
37
67
41
79
41
79
WT. LBS.
255
430
705
1,085
1,480
1,580
WHs
4
6
8
14
22
25
KV
WT. LBS.
WHs
50
100
150
200
32
48
71
88
4
5
6
7
300
600
900
1200
1500
355
520
685
850
1,020
16
17
20
24
26
CAPACITORS
SINGLE UNIT
THREE PHASE
COUPLING CAPACITOR POTENTIAL DEVICE

KV
34.5
46
69
115
138
161
230
SIZE
48
52
56
71
85
96
116
WT. LBS.
745
790
875
965
1,105
1,210
1,385
WHs
22
25
26
28
29
30
32
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 25 of 132

8. SUBSTATION COMPONENTS cont.
NEUTRAL GROUND RESISTOR
KV
2.4
4
8
20
100-400
AMP
31
46
62
--
200-600
AMP
---92
400-500
AMP
-54
77
--
500-1000
AMP
38
----
LIGHTNING ARRESTER
KV
3
6
9
12
21
37
60
96
108
120
132
144
168
198
228
300
WT. LBS.
56
57
59
61
83
125
515
710
725
780
806
860
1,050
1,070
1,275
1,288
WHs
2
3
5
6
12
17
19
21
22
23
24
25
27
29
31
35
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 26 of 132

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
KV
WT. LBS.
WHs
4
7.2
14.4
23
34.5
46
69
75
101
105
235
275
520
560
3
4
8
9
10
12
19
115
138
161
230
1,205
1,560
2,100
2,500
25
27
31
32
92
115
138
161
4,500
4,540
6,500
6,500
72
79
86
86
KV
5
7.5
13.8
23
27
34.5
46
69
115
138
161
230
WT. LBS.
110
110
135
323
710
710
720
730
1,550
1,750
2,400
2,800
WHs
6
6
7
9
16
16
17
19
31
32
43
54
DRY TYPE SINGLE PHASE
OIL FILLED SINGLE PHASE
OIL FILLED THREE PHASE
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 27 of 132

DISCONNECT SWITCH
THREE POLE MANUAL GROUP OPERATED
KV
15
34.5
46
69
115
138
161
230
600
AMP
17
25
29
34
42
54
66
83
1200
AMP
23
29
33
36
45
57
70
87
2000
AMP
25
34
36
40
48
63
77
92
SINGLE POLE HOOK STICK OPERATED

KV
4
7.2
14.4
23
34.5
46
69
600
AMP
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1200
AMP
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
2000
AMP
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 28 of 132

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
OIL FILLED THREE PHASE
1200
AMP
29
37
46
65
83
166
189
212
--
KV
14.4
23
34.5
46
69
115
138
161
230
1600
AMP
----86
169
196
215
--
2000
AMP
----116
181
200
223
--
3000
AMP
31
42
54
69
-210
208
-231
4000
AMP
35
48
62
73
------
SF6 METAL ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR

INDOOR TYPE
KV
Up to
40.5
145
300
550
AMPS
Up to
2500
3150
5000
6300
BAY DIMENSIONS
IN FEET
Width Height Depth
2
8
9
4
10
11
4
12
16
4
15
17
WHs
PER
BAY
40
90
120
130
BAY DIMENSIONS
IN FEET
Width Height Depth
4
10
3
6
11
3
6
13
5
7
14
5
10
19
5
19
14
13
30
15
17
30
18
17
36
20
17
WHs
PER
BAY
90
90
90
105
115
150
180
195
210
OUTDOOR TYPE
KV
72.5
123
145
170
245
300
362
420
550
AMPS
3150
3150
3150
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 29 of 132

INSULATORS
KV
4
7.5
13.8
23
27
34.5
66
69
115
138
161
230
SUSPENSION
TYPE
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
3
POST
TYPE
0.5
0.5
1.3
1.4
1.4
3.2
4.1
4.1
4.1
5.7
5.7
6.8
BARE COPPER CABLE SINGLE CONDUCTOR (per LF)

AMP
186
245
283
332
385
430
524
663
860
1025
SIZE
#2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
350
500
750
1000
WT. LBS.
.201
.319
.403
.508
.641
.772
1.082
1.544
2.316
3.088
WHs
.030
.039
.043
.048
.052
.057
.066
.078
.093
.100
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 30 of 132

BARE ALUMINUM CABLE (ACSR) SINGLE CONDUCTOR (per LF)
AMP
140
185
240
275
315
360
455
530
585
660
725
785
845
905
950
955
995
1025
1175
1270
1360
1540
1600
1670
1755
SIZE
4-6/1
2-6/1
1/0-6/1
2/0-6/1
3/0-6/1
4/0-6/1
266.8-26/7
336.4-26/7
397.5-26/7
477-26/7
556.5-26/7
636-26/7
715-26/7
795-26/7
874.5-54/7
900-54/7
954-54/7
1033.5-54/7
1272-54/19
1431-54/19
1590-54/19
2034-72/7
2167-72/7
2312-76/19
2515-76/19
WT. LBS.
.057
.091
.145
.183
.231
.291
.367
.463
.547
.657
.746
.875
.984
1.094
1.126
1.158
1.229
1.330
1.635
1.840
2.044
2.162
2.302
2.526
2.749
WHs
.020
.024
.031
.037
.042
.048
.052
.058
.063
.069
.074
.081
.087
.094
.096
.098
.103
.109
.127
.139
.151
.160
.174
.200
.220
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 31 of 132

BARE ALUMINUM CABLE (AAC) SINGLE CONDUCTOR (per LF)
AMP
100
137
180
220
260
280
350
400
450
500
552
605
650
690
725
740
755
790
903
1000
1035
1080
1175
1270
1360
SIZE
#4
#2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
266.8
336.4
397.5
477
556.5
636
715.5
795
874.5
900
954
1000
1250
1500
1590
1750
2000
2500
3500
WT. LBS.
.038
.061
.097
.122
.154
.195
.250
.316
.422
.447
.522
.596
.671
.746
.821
.845
.896
.938
1.180
1.402
1.493
1.643
1.876
2.368
3.350
WHs
.018
.022
.028
.033
.038
.043
.047
.052
.057
.062
.067
.073
.078
.085
.086
.088
.092
.099
.116
.126
.136
.142
.153
.161
.201
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 32 of 132

STATIC WIRE (per LF)
TYPE
Extra High Strength (EHS)
Extra High Strength (EHS)
Copperweld (CWD)
Alumoweld
SIZE
3/8
1/2
#6
3-#7
WHs
.070
.080
.053
.056
TUBULAR BUS BAR (per LF)

SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
ALUMINUM
.083
.111
.129
.153
.212
.221
.231
.461
.554
.683
.841
COPPER
.111
.120
.138
.166
.231
.240
.250
.499
.600
.740
.911
SUBSTATION COMPONENT NOTES

1.
2.
Any substation structural steel required is not included.
3.
For SF6 Circuit Breakers, the following notes apply:

Each bay unit is shipped in prefabricated assemblies on solid wooden pallets
Each bay unit is fully assembled and tested at the factory and filled with SF6 gas
No gas work at site
Work hour units do not include busduct, high voltage or control terminations
4.
5.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 33 of 132

9. GENERATORS
EMERGENCY GENERATORS
CAPACITY
KW
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
50
60
75
90
100
125
150
200
300
400
500
750
1000
1200
OUTPUT (AMPS)
125V 250V 500V
40
20
10
80
40
20
120
60
30
160
80
40
200
100
50
240
120
60
28
140
70
400
200
100
480
240
120
600
300
150
720
360
180
800
400
200
1000
500
250
1200
600
300
1600
800
400
2400
1200
600
3200
1600
800
4000
2000
1000
6000
3000
1500
8000
4000
2000
9600
4800
2400
WT. LBS.
404
592
940
1,125
1,500
1,800
2,100
2,200
2,300
2,600
2,700
2,755
3,444
5,970
6,200
7,837
10,910
11,675
16,500
20,000
24,000
WHs
17
21
27
30
37
42
48
50
52
67
69
70
82
92
114
134
171
180
278
320
368
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

AMPS
30
60
100
150
225
250
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
WHs
7
8
11
13
15
15
19
30
37
39
42
49
58
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 34 of 132

9. GENERATORS cont.
GENERATOR NOTES
1.
2.
Work hour units include setting generator in place, controls connected, batteries
and charger installed.
3.
Work hour units do not include exhaust system piping, fuel piping, underground
fuel tank, additional cooling system, remote alarm annunciator, etc., as required.
4.
5.
For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson,
NECA or other recognized estimating publications.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 35 of 132

10. UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
SELF CONTAINED SYSTEM UP TO 600V
KVA
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
5.0
7.5
10
15
20
30
40
50.0
WHs
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
15
20
25
32
40
50
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) NOTES

1.
2.
3.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 36 of 132

C. POWER FEEDERS AND MOTOR RUNS
11. CONDUIT, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES
RIGID STEEL
CONDUIT (per LF)
RSC1
U/G
.040
.040
.060
.070
.080
.100
.130
.150
.180
.250
.360
.450
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
RSC1
O/H
.070
.080
.110
.120
.140
.170
.220
.280
.320
.420
.600
.800
IMC2
U/G
.036
.036
.054
.063
.072
.090
.117
.135
.162
.225
.324
.405
IMC2
O/H
.063
.072
.099
.108
.126
.153
.198
.252
.288
.378
.540
.720
NOTES
1.
2.
RSC1 Rigid Steel Conduit & IMC2 Intermediate Metal Conduit

Conduit units exclude bends (factory or field), terminations and supports.
CONDUIT FITTINGS (FERALOY - MALLEABLE IRON)

Includes cover and gasket
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
2-HUB (LB)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.9
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.2
5.5
6.3
6.5
7.5
8.0
--12.0
---
3-HUB (TEE)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
2.1
2.4
2.5
2.9
3.0
3.5
4.7
-6.1
-7.7
-8.6
------
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 37 of 132

C. POWER FEEDERS AND MOTOR RUNS cont.
11. CONDUIT, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES cont
RIGID STEEL cont.
CONDUIT CLAMPS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
RIGHT ANGLE/
PARALLEL
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.60
OTHER FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
SEALING
EYS-FEM
EYD-FEM
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.3
4.0
-6.0
--
UNIONS
UNY
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.9
2.2
2.5
2.7
3.0
4.5
7.1
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 38 of 132

RIGID STEEL cont.
CONDUIT TERMINATIONS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
HUB
INSUL GROUNDING
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.5
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.3
4.5
5.0
7.1
7.7
BUSHING
INSUL GROUNDING
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.2
0.9
1.8
1.2
2.2
1.2
2.7
1.5
3.3
2.1
4.1
3.0
4.8
CONDUIT BENDS
SIZE
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
FACTORY
U/G
O/H
0.5
0.9
0.6
1.0
0.8
1.4
1.2
2.0
1.8
3.0
2.1
3.5
2.7
4.5
3.3
6.0
4.8
8.0
FIELD
U/G
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
2.4
3.2
O/H
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.0
3.0
4.0
NOTES
1.
2.
Labor units for factory bends are added into the estimate the same as
conduit fittings.
Labor units for field bends are in addition to the linear conduit quantity.
The actual bend is part of the conduit quantity, only labor is added.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 39 of 132

RIGID STEEL cont.
FACTORY LONG RADIUS 90 ELBOW
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
24
RADIUS
U/G
O/H
0.6
0.9
0.8
1.2
0.8
1.2
1.1
1.7
1.8
3.1
2.2
3.6
2.6
4.2
3.2
4.9
-------------
36
RADIUS
U/G
O/H
0.8
1.1
0.9
1.3
0.9
1.4
1.2
2.1
2.0
3.3
2.6
4.2
3.2
5.3
3.7
6.2
4.3
7.4
5.5
9.4
48
RADIUS
U/G
O/H
0.9
1.3
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.3
2.3
2.2
3.5
2.8
4.5
3.4
5.6
4.0
6.5
4.6
7.8
5.8
9.8
FLEX SEALTITE & FLEX STEEL
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
CONDUIT (per LF)

SEALTITE
STEEL
.090
.060
.120
.075
.150
.095
.200
.150
.225
.200
.250
.250
.350
.350
.500
.400
1.000
----
CONDUIT CONNECTORS
INSULATED THROAT
STRAIGHT
SEALTITE
STEEL
PLAIN GROUNDING SQUEEZE
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.6
0.7
0.5
0.8
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.0
1.5
1.8
----
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 40 of 132

RIGID STEEL cont.
EXPANSION JOINTS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4 MOVEMENT
BONDING JUMPER
WITHOUT
WITH
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.8
2.1
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.2
3.6
3.8
4.2
EXPLOSION PROOF FLEX (CLASS 1, DIV. 1)

4 through 12 lengths
SIZE
1
1
1
2
WHs
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
2.0
8 MOVEMENT
BONDING JUMPER
WITHOUT
WITH
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.3
2.5
3.0
3.3
3.6
3.5
4.0
4.2
4.7
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 41 of 132

C.
POWER FEEDERS AND MOTOR RUNS cont.

11. CONDUIT, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES cont.
ALUMINUM
CONDUIT (per LF)
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
O/H
.063
.072
.099
.108
.126
.153
.198
.252
.288
.378
.540
.720
NOTE
1. Conduit units exclude bends (factory or field), terminations and supports.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
2-HUB (LB)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.9
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.2
5.5
6.3
6.5
7.5
8.0
--12.0
---
3-HUB (TEE)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
2.1
2.4
2.5
2.9
3.0
3.5
4.7
-6.1
-7.7
-8.6
------
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 42 of 132

ALUMINUM cont.
CONDUIT CLAMPS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
RIGHT ANGLE/
PARALLEL
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.60
OTHER FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
SEALING
EYS-FEM
EYD-FEM
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.3
4.0
-6.0
--
UNIONS
UNY
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.9
2.2
2.5
2.7
3.0
4.5
7.1
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 43 of 132

ALUMINUM cont.
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
HUB
INSUL GROUNDING
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.5
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.3
4.5
5.0
7.1
7.7
BUSHING
INSUL GROUNDING
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.2
0.9
1.8
1.2
2.2
1.2
2.7
1.5
3.3
2.1
4.1
3.0
4.8
CONDUIT BENDS
SIZE
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
FACTORY
O/H
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.4
2.0
2.4
3.0
4.5
6.0
FIELD
O/H
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.9
2.3
3.0
NOTES
1.
2.
conduit fittings.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 44 of 132

C.

PVC COATED RIGID STEEL
CONDUIT (per LF)
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
U/G
.050
.050
.070
.080
.100
.120
.160
.180
.220
.300
.430
.540
O/H
.080
.100
.130
.140
.170
.200
.260
.340
.380
.500
.720
.960
NOTE
1. Conduit units exclude bends (factory or field), terminations and supports.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
2-HUB (LB)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.0
3.5
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.2
6.6
7.6
7.8
9.0
3-HUB (TEE)
NON-HAZ
& DIV.2
DIV. 1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.5
2.9
3.0
3.5
3.6
4.2
5.6
-7.3
-8.6
-10.0
--
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 45 of 132

PVC COATED RIGID STEEL - cont.
CONDUIT CLAMPS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
RIGHT ANGLE/
PARALLEL
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.60
OTHER FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
SEALING
EYS-FEM
EYD-FEM
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.6
4.0
-----
UNIONS
UNY
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.8
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.3
3.6
5.4
8.5
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 46 of 132

PVC COATED RIGID STEEL cont.
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
HUB
INSUL GROUNDING
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.5
2.6
3.0
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
4.0
5.4
6.0
8.5
9.2
CONDUIT BENDS
SIZE
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
FACTORY
U/G
O/H
0.6
1.1
0.7
1.2
1.0
1.7
1.4
2.4
2.2
3.6
2.5
4.2
3.2
5.4
4.0
7.2
5.8
9.6
FIELD
U/G
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.7
1.9
2.9
3.8
O/H
0.8
1.1
1.2
1.6
1.8
2.2
2.4
3.6
4.8
NOTES
1.
2.
conduit fittings.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 47 of 132

PVC
CONDUIT (per LF)
SCH. 40
U/G
O/H
.040
.070
.050
.080
.070
.110
.080
.120
.090
.140
.110
.170
.140
.210
.150
.220
.170
.260
.220
.350
.290
.470
.380
.670
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
SCH. 80
U/G
O/H
.042
.074
.053
.084
.074
.116
.084
.126
.095
.147
.116
.179
.147
.221
.158
.231
------.231
.368
.305
.494
.399
.704
NOTE
1. Conduit units exclude bends (factory or field) and supports.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
2-HUB
(LB)
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.2
1.5
2.3
3.2
4.6
6.0
7.4
-----
3-HUB
(TEE)
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.5
-------------
FEMALE
ADAPTER
PVC to
STL/ALUM
U/G
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.4
1.6
BELL
ENDS
U/G
----0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.4
1.6
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 48 of 132

PVC cont.
CONDUIT CLAMPS
RIGHT ANGLE/
PARALLEL
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.60
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
CONDUIT BENDS
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
FACTORY
SCH. 40
SCH. 80
U/G
O/H
U/G
0.2
0.4
--0.3
0.4
--0.3
0.4
--0.3
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.5
1.4
1.5
1.8
1.7
1.9
2.3
2.2
2.5
3.0
--3.3
3.8
---
FIELD (HEAT BENDING)

SCH. 40
SCH. 80
U/G
O/H
U/G
0.2
0.4
--0.3
0.4
--0.3
0.4
--0.3
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.6
0.8
1.1
0.9
0.9
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.4
1.3
1.8
2.2
--2.2
2.8
---
NOTES
1.
2.
conduit fittings.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 49 of 132

PVC cont.
PLASTIC SPACERS FOR UNDERGROUND DUCT
SIZE
2
3
4
5
6
BASE
0.18
0.23
0.26
0.30
0.33
INTERMEDIATE
0.12
0.15
0.17
0.20
0.22
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 50 of 132

C.

ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
CONDUIT (per LF)
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
O/H
.045
.050
.055
.062
.070
.080
.095
.110
.130
.160
CONDUIT FITTINGS
With cover
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
COMPRESSION
CONNECTORS
2-HUB 3-HUB INSULATED COMPRESSION
(LB)
(TEE) THROAT
COUPLINGS
0.6
0.8
0.2
0.31
0.7
1.0
0.2
0.37
0.9
1.2
0.3
0.43
1.2
1.5
0.3
0.50
1.5
1.8
0.4
0.62
2.3
2.5
0.5
0.75
3.2
--0.6
0.87
4.6
--0.8
1.00
6.0
--0.9
1.12
7.4
--1.1
1.25
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 51 of 132

C.

12. CABLE TRAY
CABLE LADDER TRAY & FITTINGS ALUMINUM 9 RS - 6 HSR
ITEM
Straight section (per LF)
Elbow 45
12 R
Horz. Or Vert. 24 R
36 R
Elbow 90
12 R
Horz. Or Vert. 24 R
36 R
Tee Horz.
12 R
24 R
36 R
Cross Horz.
12 R
24 R
36 R
Reducer
Blind End
Ladder to Box Conn.
Cable Dropout
6
0.158
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.7
2.8
2.9
4.7
5.0
5.3
6.2
6.6
7.0
--0.5
2.5
0.5
9
0.163
2.0
2.1
2.2
3.0
3.1
3.2
5.0
5.3
5.6
6.5
6.9
7.3
2.5
0.6
2.8
0.6
12
0.175
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.3
3.4
3.5
5.3
5.6
5.9
7.1
7.5
7.9
2.8
0.6
3.3
0.6
WIDTH
18
0.181
2.4
2.5
2.6
3.6
3.8
4.0
6.0
6.3
6.6
7.7
8.1
8.5
3.3
0.7
3.8
0.7
24
0.193
2.7
2.9
3.1
4.2
4.4
4.6
6.5
6.9
7.3
8.3
8.8
9.3
3.8
0.8
4.4
0.8
30
0.210
3.1
3.3
3.5
4.7
5.0
5.3
7.1
7.5
7.9
8.9
9.4
9.9
4.4
0.8
5.3
0.8
36
0.228
3.5
3.8
4.1
5.3
5.6
5.9
7.7
8.1
8.5
9.5
10.0
10.5
5.0
0.9
6.3
0.9
MISCELLANEOUS ADDERS:
Std Plate Connector
Exp Connector
Adj Connector Vert
Adj Connector Horz
Bonding Jumper
1.0/PR
1.5/PR
1.2/PR
1.2/PR
0.2/EA
Straight Section:
For:
use above units times
6 HSR, 6 RS
1.05
6 HSR, 12 RS
0.94
4 HSR, 6 RS
0.84
4 HSR, 9 RS
0.80
4 HSR, 12 RS
0.76
Hold Down Clips

Straight Barrier Strip
Flex Barrier Strip
Riser ELB Barrier Strip
0.02/EA
15/CFT
20/CFT
1.2/EA
Elbows, Tees, Crosses & Reducers:

use above units times
1.05
0.95
1.00
0.95
0.90
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 52 of 132

C.

12. CABLE TRAY cont.
CABLE LADDER TRAY & FITTING COVERS ALUMINUM
COVERS
Straight section (per LF)
Elbow 45
12 R
Horz. Or Vert. 24 R
36 R
Elbow 90
12 R
Horz. Or Vert. 24 R
36 R
Tee Horz.
12 R
24 R
36 R
Cross Horz.
12 R
24 R
36 R
Reducer
Clamps
6
0.037
0.10
0.12
0.12
0.10
0.12
0.12
0.16
0.18
0.18
0.23
0.25
0.25
--0.12
9
0.044
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.19
0.19
0.21
0.25
0.25
0.27
0.15
0.13
12
0.058
0.14
0.17
0.17
0.14
0.17
0.17
0.23
0.25
0.25
0.29
0.31
0.33
0.17
0.15
WIDTH
18
0.072
0.17
0.21
0.21
0.17
0.21
0.21
0.29
0.31
0.34
0.34
0.37
0.40
0.21
0.17
24
0.087
0.21
0.23
0.25
0.23
0.25
0.28
0.35
0.37
0.40
0.46
0.50
0.54
0.25
0.20
30
0.109
0.23
0.25
0.28
0.28
0.31
0.34
0.40
0.43
0.48
0.58
0.62
0.67
0.31
0.22
ADJUSTMENTS FOR OTHER MATERIALS:

For Aluminum Solid Bottom, adjust ladder tray & fitting units as follows:
Width
6
9
12
18
24
30
36
Multiply by
1.00
1.07
1.15
1.30
1.45
1.53
1.60
For Galvanized Steel straight section tray, add 36%. Use same units for all other items.
For Galvanized Steel straight section cover, add 15%. Use same units for all other items.
For FRP, multiply by 96%.
36
0.131
0.28
0.31
0.34
0.33
0.37
0.40
0.46
0.50
0.56
0.70
0.75
0.81
0.37
0.25
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 53 of 132

C.

12. CABLE TRAY cont.
CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS
TRAPEZE TYPE
6
9
12
18
24
30
36
WHs
4.00
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.35
4.40
4.45
TOP OF PIPE BRIDGE

6 through 36
WHs
2.10
SIDE OF PIPE BRIDGE

6
9
12
18
24
30
36
WHs
2.15
2.25
2.45
2.65
2.75
2.90
3.20
WIREWAY
WHs/LF
SIZE
2 x 2
4 x 4
6 x 6
8 x 8
12 x 12
SCREWED
COVER
LAY-IN
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.17
0.20
FLANGED END
W/KNOCKOUTS
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.20
0.24
JIC TYPE
W/O KNOCKOUTS
0.14
0.16
0.19
0.22
0.26
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 54 of 132

C.

13. WIRE & CABLE
600V
STRANDED CU THW (IN CONDUIT)
AWG
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
1/C
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.009
.007
.009
.007
.011
.008
.014
.011
.015
.012
.018
.014
.021
.017
.025
.019
.030
.024
.032
.025
.039
.030
.042
.032
WIRE TERMINATION
PER CONDUCTOR (WHs/EA)
.20
.20
.20
.25
.35
.40
.50
.60
.70
.80
1.00
1.10
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.048
.057
.066
.081
.093
1.30
1.50
1.80
2.00
2.30
.037
.045
.051
.063
.072
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 55 of 132

C.

13. WIRE & CABLE cont.
600V cont.
STRANDED CU THW (T.C. CABLE)
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
3/C
WHs/LF
.025
.035
.040
.048
.050
.071
.077
.094
.100
4/C
WHs/LF
.033
.047
.053
.064
.067
.095
.103
.125
.133
KCMIL
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
750
.105
.108
.110
.130
.140
.160
.180
.190
.140
.144
.147
.160
.187
.209
.231
.253
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 56 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU GALVANIZED STEEL INTERLOCKED ARMOR
TYPE MC (XHHW) WITH PVC JACKET AND GROUND WIRE
WT.
per
1,000
LF
530
625
685
820
895
1,085
1,235
1,520
1,495
1,850
1,755
2,190
2,080
2,645
3,060
3,995
No.
Of
Conductors
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
AWG
8
8
6
6
4
4
2
2
1
1
1/0
1/0
2/0
2/0
4/0
4/0
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
KCMIL
250
3,685
250
4,650
350
4,845
350
6,150
500
6,605
500
8,425
750
9,500
750
12,260
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
Inches Tray Hung Burial
0.89
.051
.064
.031
0.95
.056
.070
.034
0.97
.057
.071
.034
1.04
.065
.081
.039
1.07
.063
.079
.038
1.15
.071
.089
.043
1.19
.075
.094
.045
1.29
.083
.104
.050
1.32
.082
.103
.049
1.43
.090
.113
.051
1.41
.090
.113
.051
1.53
.098
.123
.056
1.50
.097
.121
.055
1.66
.105
.131
.060
1.75
.112
.140
.064
1.93
.124
.155
.071
1.91
2.09
2.13
2.34
2.44
2.69
2.90
3.22
.120
.131
.150
.162
.165
.184
.195
.227
.150
.164
.188
.203
.206
.230
.244
.284
NOTE
1. Use C-L-X type MC for conductors smaller than #8 AWG.
.068
.072
.083
.089
.091
.101
.107
.125
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 57 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU C-L-X TYPE MC (XHHW) ALUMINUM SHEATH
WITH PVC JACKET
AWG
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
WT.
per
1,000
LF
150
180
205
235
280
345
425
570
1,035
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
0.60
.033
.041
.020
0.64
.035
.044
.021
0.68
.037
.046
.022
0.72
.040
.050
.024
0.76
.043
.054
.026
0.85
.049
.061
.029
0.95
.056
.070
.034
1.03
.063
.079
.038
1.40
.090
.113
.054
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
19
37
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
180
215
255
295
345
440
545
770
1,395
0.64
0.68
0.72
0.76
0.81
0.90
1.03
1.17
1.53
.035
.037
.043
.045
.050
.056
.068
.075
.109
.044
.046
.054
.056
.063
.070
.085
.094
.136
.021
.022
.026
.027
.030
.034
.041
.045
.065
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
220
270
320
365
470
585
745
0.68
0.72
0.76
0.76
0.90
0.99
1.13
.037
.039
.044
.047
.052
.059
.072
.046
.049
.055
.059
.065
.074
.090
.022
.023
.026
.028
.031
.035
.043
No.
Of
Conductors
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
19
37
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 58 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU C-L-X TYPE MC (XHHW) ALUMINUM SHEATH
WITH PVC JACKET AND GROUND WIRE
WT.
per
1,000
LF
235
270
310
360
415
500
555
680
740
915
1,055
1,375
1,330
1,665
1,575
2,030
1,890
2,430
2,825
3,600
No.
Of
Conductors
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
AWG
12
12
10
10
8
8
6
6
4
4
2
2
1
1
1/0
1/0
2/0
2/0
4/0
4/0
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
KCMIL
250
3,300
250
4,240
350
4,410
350
5,795
500
6,145
500
7,910
750
8,935
750
11,770
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
0.68
.037
.046
.022
0.72
.043
.054
.026
0.76
.039
.049
.023
0.81
.044
.055
.026
0.85
.048
.060
.029
0.95
.053
.066
.032
0.99
.054
.068
.032
1.08
.062
.078
.037
1.03
.060
.075
.036
1.13
.067
.084
.041
1.17
.071
.089
.043
1.35
.079
.099
.047
1.35
.078
.098
.047
1.48
.086
.108
.049
1.45
.086
.108
.049
1.65
.093
.116
.053
1.58
.092
.115
.052
1.73
.100
.125
.057
1.82
.106
.133
.060
2.00
.118
.148
.067
2.00
2.28
2.28
2.56
2.56
2.83
3.06
3.50
.114
.124
.143
.154
.157
.175
.185
.216
.143
.155
.179
.193
.196
.219
.231
.270
.065
.068
.079
.085
.086
.096
.102
.119
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 59 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU THHN/THWN WITH PVC JACKET
No.
Of
Conductors
2
3
4
5
7
9
10
12
15
19
20
24
30
37
50
2
3
4
5
7
9
10
12
15
19
20
24
30
37
50
60
AWG
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
WT.
per
1,000
LF
48
60
72
89
117
148
165
180
244
285
310
360
426
570
730
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
.305
.015
.015
.012
.320
.016
.016
.012
.340
.018
.018
.014
.370
.020
.020
.015
.400
.022
.022
.017
.465
.023
.023
.018
.500
.024
.024
.018
.520
.026
.026
.020
.585
.029
.029
.022
.635
.032
.032
.025
.665
.034
.034
.026
.730
.038
.038
.029
.775
.045
.045
.035
.885
.051
.051
.039
1.027 .058
.058
.045
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
62
80
97
120
153
200
231
267
330
396
463
494
637
766
1,020
1,200
.325
.345
.380
.410
.445
.515
.595
.610
.675
.710
.745
.825
.915
.980
1.15
1.21
.018
.019
.020
.022
.024
.027
.029
.031
.034
.037
.039
.041
.047
.056
.064
.075
.018
.019
.020
.022
.024
.027
.029
.031
.034
.037
.039
.041
.047
.056
.064
.075
.014
.015
.015
.017
.018
.021
.022
.024
.026
.028
.030
.032
.036
.043
.049
.058
NOTE
1. For #18 AWG, multiply #16 AWG units by 0.93.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 60 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU XHHW WITH PVC JACKET
No.
Of
Conductors
2
3
4
5
7
9
10
12
15
19
20
25
30
37
2
3
4
5
7
9
12
16
19
25
30
37
AWG
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
WT.
per
1,000
LF
77
110
139
165
217
297
324
377
480
568
642
850
910
1,100
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
.370
.019
.019
.015
.385
.020
.020
.015
.420
.023
.023
.018
.460
.025
.025
.019
.500
.028
.028
.022
.615
.031
.031
.024
.665
.034
.034
.026
.685
.038
.038
.029
.760
.041
.041
.032
.800
.044
.044
.034
.885
.045
.045
.035
1.08
.050
.050
.039
1.13
.057
.057
.044
1.20
.068
.068
.052
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
120
160
210
273
362
461
573
836
920
1,260
1,525
1,900
.440
.450
.515
.570
.620
.730
.810
1.01
1.12
1.21
1.32
1.43
.020
.021
.024
.026
.029
.033
.040
.044
.046
.053
.060
.071
.020
.021
.024
.026
.029
.033
.040
.044
.046
.053
.060
.071
.015
.016
.018
.020
.022
.025
.031
.034
.035
.041
.046
.055
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 61 of 132

C.

600V cont.
STRANDED CU VFD TYPE TC (XLPE) DUAL SHIELDED
(FOIL & 85% TCB) WITH PVC JACKET AND GROUND WIRE
No.
Of
Conductors
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
AWG
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
WT.
per
1,000
LF
140
190
250
293
409
602
898
1,100
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
0.49
.030
.035
.017
0.56
.033
.039
.019
0.60
.039
.046
.022
0.67
.040
.047
.022
0.91
.048
.056
.027
1.00
.056
.066
.032
1.15
.060
.071
.034
1.31
.071
.084
.040
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 62 of 132

C.

5 KV
1/C STRANDED CU WITH PVC JACKET IN CONDUIT
100% OR 133% INSULATION LEVEL
WHs/LF
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
SHIELDED
O/H
U/G
.021
.016
.023
.017
.026
.020
.032
.024
.034
.026
.037
.028
.041
.031
.045
.034
.050
.038
NON-SHIELDED
O/H
U/G
.018
.014
.021
.016
.023
.017
.029
.022
.032
.024
.034
.026
.039
.029
.043
.032
.047
.035
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.055
.066
.079
.096
.110
.051
.061
.073
.088
.101
.041
.050
.059
.072
.083
.038
.046
.055
.066
.076
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 63 of 132

C.

5 KV cont.
3/C STRANDED CU EPR UNARMORED WITH PVC JACKET
AND GROUND WIRE
SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,015
1,325
1,920
2,260
3,270
KCMIL
250
3,740
350
4,980
500
6,595
750
9,585
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
1.20
.060
.060
.045
1.32
.067
.067
.050
1.52
.082
.082
.062
1.62
.090
.090
.068
1.92
.105
.105
.079
2.01
2.24
2.52
2.98
.112
.127
.150
.180
.112
.127
.150
.180
.081
.091
.108
.130
NON-SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,010
1,335
1,865
2,185
3,235
KCMIL
250
3,670
350
4,855
500
6,625
750
9,585
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
1.28
.059
.059
.044
1.41
.066
.066
.050
1.58
.080
.080
.060
1.67
.088
.088
.066
1.96
.103
.103
.077
2.06
2.29
2.59
3.05
.110
.124
.147
.176
.110
.124
.147
.176
.079
.089
.106
.127
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 64 of 132

C.

5 KV cont.
3/C STRANDED CU EPR C-L-X TYPE MV-90 ALUMINUM SHEATH
SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,395
1,690
2,270
2,650
3,630
KCMIL
250
4,040
350
5,340
500
7,710
750
10,510
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
1.75
.066
.083
.038
1.75
.078
.098
.044
1.95
.092
.115
.052
2.16
.100
.125
.057
2.34
.114
.143
.065
2.34
2.56
3.37
3.62
.128
.157
.171
.200
.160
.196
.214
.250
.070
.086
.094
.110
NON-SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,095
1,475
2,005
2,390
3,315
KCMIL
250
3,790
350
5,115
500
6,850
750
10,030
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
1.45
.065
.081
.037
1.65
.076
.095
.043
1.78
.090
.113
.051
2.00
.098
.123
.056
2.14
.112
.140
.064
2.28
2.58
3.03
3.44
.125
.154
.167
.196
.156
.193
.209
.245
.069
.085
.092
.108
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 65 of 132

C.

5 KV cont.
3/C STRANDED CU EPR GALVANIZED STEEL INTERLOCKED ARMOR
TYPE MV-90 WITH PVC JACKET AND GROUND WIRE
SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,460
1,805
2,395
3,060
3,985
KCMIL
250
4,635
350
5,800
500
7,920
750
10,790
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
1.49
.069
.086
.039
1.64
.082
.103
.047
1.83
.097
.121
.055
2.02
.105
.131
.060
2.20
.120
.150
.068
2.27
2.52
2.81
3.26
.135
.165
.180
.210
.169
.206
.225
.263
.074
.091
.099
.116
NON-SHIELDED
AWG
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,265
1,630
2,235
2,755
3,790
KCMIL
250
4,245
350
5,375
500
7,455
750
10,510
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
1.42
.068
.085
.039
1.58
.080
.100
.046
1.75
.095
.119
.054
1.94
.103
.129
.059
2.19
.118
.148
.067
2.21
2.47
2.86
3.21
.132
.162
.176
.206
.165
.203
.220
.258
.073
.089
.097
.113
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 66 of 132

C.

15 KV
SHIELDED
100% INSULATION LEVEL
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.041
.031
.044
.033
.048
.036
.052
.039
.056
.042
.061
.046
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.064
.075
.089
.110
.123
.048
.056
.067
.083
.092

AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.042
.032
.045
.034
.049
.037
.053
.040
.057
.043
.062
.047
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.065
.077
.091
.112
.125
.049
.058
.068
.084
.094
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 67 of 132

C.

15 KV cont.
3/C STRANDED CU EPR UNARMORED WITH PVC JACKET
AND GROUND WIRE
SHIELDED
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
1,848
2,064
2,435
2,787
3,707
KCMIL
250
4,134
350
4,863
500
7,169
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
1.88
.075
.075
.056
1.96
.080
.080
.060
2.04
.088
.088
.066
2.13
.095
.095
.071
2.37
.110
.110
.083
2.47
2.69
3.03
.118
.132
.162
.118
.132
.162
.085
.095
.117
AWG
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
2,353
2,724
2,988
4,050
KCMIL
250
4,490
350
5,932
500
7,568
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Conduit
Inches Tray O/H
U/G
2.16
.082
.082
.062
2.25
.090
.090
.068
2.35
.097
.097
.073
2.58
.112
.112
.084
2.77
2.99
3.33
.120
.135
.165
.120
.135
.165
.086
.097
.119
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 68 of 132

C.

15 KV cont.
SHIELDED
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
2,170
2,490
2,785
3,230
4,405
KCMIL
250
4,900
350
6,500
500
8,685
750
11,840
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
2.14
.086
.108
.049
2.28
.092
.115
.052
2.32
.100
.125
.057
2.44
.106
.133
.060
2.83
.128
.160
.073
2.83
3.25
3.50
4.20
.143
.171
.185
.220
.179
.214
.231
.275
.079
.094
.102
.121
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
2,650
2,965
3,260
3,710
4,875
KCMIL
250
5,535
350
7,060
500
9,170
750
12,415
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
2.46
.088
.110
.051
2.56
.095
.119
.054
2.56
.103
.129
.059
2.83
.109
.136
.062
3.03
.132
.165
.075
3.15
3.44
3.96
4.37
.147
.176
.191
.227
.184
.220
.239
.284
.081
.097
.105
.125
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 69 of 132

C.

15 KV cont.
3/C STRANDED CU EPR GALVANIZED STEEL INTERLOCKED ARMOR
TYPE MV-90 WITH PVC JACKET AND GROUND WIRE
SHIELDED
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
2,575
2,905
3,240
3,640
4,865
KCMIL
250
5,430
350
6,890
500
8,910
750
12,210
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
2.05
.090
.113
.051
2.14
.097
.121
.055
2.23
.105
.131
.060
2.32
.112
.140
.064
2.59
.135
.169
.077
2.71
2.98
3.28
3.73
.150
.180
.195
.232
.188
.225
.244
.290
.083
.099
.071
.128
AWG
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
3,105
3,300
3,735
4,270
5,420
KCMIL
250
6,010
350
7,475
500
9,470
750
12,835
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
2.28
.093
.116
.053
2.34
.100
.125
.057
2.47
.108
.135
.062
2.56
.115
.144
.066
2.79
.139
.174
.079
2.96
3.21
3.48
3.93
.155
.185
.210
.239
.194
.231
.251
.299
.085
.102
.111
.131
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 70 of 132

C.

35 KV
SHIELDED
AWG
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.060
.042
.065
.046
.070
.049
.076
.053
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.080
.090
.107
.132
.148
.056
.063
.075
.092
.104

AWG
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.061
.043
.066
.047
.071
.050
.078
.055
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.082
.092
.109
.135
.151
.057
.064
.076
.095
.106
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 71 of 132

C.

35 KV cont.
SHIELDED
AWG
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
4,605
5,035
6,450
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
3.34
.126
.158
.069
3.42
.137
.171
.075
3.81
.160
.200
.088
KCMIL
250
7,095 3.85
350
8,585 4.20
500
10,635 4.45
.168
.185
.219
.207
.231
.274
.092
.096
.114
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 72 of 132

C.

69 KV
SHIELDED
AWG
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.076
.052
.082
.056
.087
.059
.094
.063
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.097
.105
.125
.155
.172
.065
.071
.085
.104
.116

AWG
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.078
.053
.084
.058
.089
.061
.097
.066
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
.100
.109
.128
.160
.177
.067
.072
.086
.109
.120
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 73 of 132

C.

69 KV cont.
SHIELDED
AWG
1/0
2/0
4/0
WT.
per
1,000
LF
6,654
7,275
9,320
Approx.
WHs/LF
O.D.
Direct
4.52
.152
.190
.080
4.62
.165
.206
.087
5.15
.193
.241
.102
KCMIL
250
10,252 5.21
350
12,405 5.68
500
15,367 6.02
.203
.223
.264
.249
.278
.330
.107
.112
.132
ECONOMIES OF SCALE FOR WIRE & CABLE

If more than three wires at a time are being pulled, deduct the following percentages
from the labor of that grouping:
4-5 wires
6-10 wires
11-15 wires
over 15 wires
25%
30%
35%
40%
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 74 of 132

C.

14. CABLE TESTING
HIGH POT
600V
5 & 15KV
WH/CONDUCTOR
1.0
2.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 75 of 132

C.

15. TERMINATION KITS
CROSS-LINKED POLY, BUTYL OR OTHER RUBBER-LIKE INSULATED CABLE
SINGLE CONDUCTOR
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
5KV
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.3
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
15KV
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.5
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.4
3.6
35KV
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
7.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.1
4.4
4.0
4.2
4.6
4.9
5.3
7.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
5KV
3.0
3.4
3.6
4.2
4.6
4.8
5.2
5.6
6.0
15KV
3.6
4.0
4.4
5.0
5.6
5.8
6.2
6.8
7.2
35KV
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
14.0
14.0
6.6
7.0
7.6
8.2
8.8
8.0
8.4
9.2
9.8
10.6
14.0
14.0
14.0
18.0
18.0
THREE CONDUCTOR
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 76 of 132

C.

15. TERMINATION KITS cont.
MOTOR TERMINATIONS (PIGTAIL)
3 WIRE, THREE PHASE
HP
5 and below
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
600V
1.55
1.65
1.75
1.85
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.50
4.00
5.00
6.25
7.50
9.00
NOTE
1.
Units shown include lugs and hardware.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 77 of 132

C.

16. SPLICE KITS
CROSS-LINKED POLY, BUTYL OR OTHER RUBBER-LIKE INSULATED CABLE
SINGLE CONDUCTOR
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
5KV
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
15KV
3.6
3.6
3.6
4.2
4.2
4.2
5.4
5.4
5.4
35KV
8.0
8.0
8.3
8.8
9.0
9.5
9.8
10.0
11.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
6.5
8.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.8
9.6
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
5KV
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
15KV
7.2
7.2
7.2
8.4
8.4
8.4
10.8
10.8
10.8
35KV
16.0
16.0
16.5
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
20.0
22.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
13.0
16.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
15.6
19.2
24.0
26.0
28.0
30.0
32.0
THREE CONDUCTOR
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
1000
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 78 of 132

C.

17. CABLE TERMINATOR
UNARMORED CABLE
MALE
THREAD
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
CABLE
O.D. RANGE
IN INCHES
0.125-0.625
0.625-0.750
0.750-1.000
1.000-1.188
1.188-1.375
1.375-1.875
1.875-2.188
2.188-2.500
2.500-3.000
3.000-3.500
3.500-4.250
NONHAZARDOUS
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.2
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
ARMORED AND ALUMINUM SHEATHED CABLE

MALE
THREAD
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
CABLE
O.D. RANGE
IN INCHES
0.625-0.875
0.625-0.875
0.750-1.000
1.000-1.375
1.375-1.625
1.625-1.875
1.875-2.188
2.188-2.500
2.500-3.000
3.000-3.500
3.500-4.250
NONHAZARDOUS
0.8
1.1
1.7
2.2
2.2
3.3
4.4
5.5
6.6
7.7
8.8
NOTE
1.
Cable Terminator for Class I Div. II includes seal.
CLASS IDIV. II
1.4
1.7
2.4
3.0
3.1
4.3
5.6
6.9
8.3
9.7
11.8
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 79 of 132

C.

18. ENCLOSURES
NEMA TYPE 12
SIZE
6x4x4
6x6x4
8x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 10 x 4
12 x 6 x 4
12 x 8 x 4
12 x 10 x 4
12 x 12 x 4
16 x 12 x 4
18 x 12 x 4
18 x 16 x 4
WHs
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.5
4.0
6x6x6
8x8x6
10 x 8 x 6
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 8 x 6
12 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
16 x 12 x 6
16 x 16 x 6
18 x 12 x 6
18 x 16 x 6
18 x 18 x 6
24 x 18 x 6
24 x 24 x 6
30 x 20 x 6
30 x 24 x 6
36 x 30 x 6
1.0
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.6
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.9
2.9
2.9
3.6
3.6
3.7
4.0
4.2
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 80 of 132

C.

18. ENCLOSURES cont.
NEMA TYPE 12 cont.
SIZE
16 x 12 x 8
20 x 12 x 8
20 x 16 x 8
20 x 20 x 8
24 x 12 x 8
24 x 16 x 8
24 x 24 x 8
30 x 20 x 8
30 x 24 x 8
36 x 24 x 8
36 x 30 x 8
42 x 24 x 8
42 x 30 x 8
42 x 36 x 8
48 x 30 x 8
48 x 36 x 8
WHs
2.3
2.9
2.9
3.2
2.9
2.9
3.7
3.7
4.2
4.3
5.2
4.6
6.3
8.1
7.2
8.1
NEMA TYPE 3 & 3R

SIZE
6x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
18 x 12 x 6
18 x 18 x 8
24 x 18 x 8
24 x 24 x 8
30 x 18 x 10
30 x 30 x 10
36 x 24 x 10
36 x 36 x 10
WHs
1.1
1.3
1.7
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
8.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 81 of 132

C.

NEMA TYPE 4X
SIZE
6x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
18 x 12 x 6
30 x 24 x 6
18 x 18 x 8
24 x 18 x 8
24 x 24 x 8
WHs
1.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
5.0
19.0
9.0
12.0
16.0
NEMA TYPE 7 CLASS I, GROUP D

SIZE
6x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
18 x 12 x 6
30 x 18 x 6
18 x 18 x 8
24 x 18 x 8
24 x 24 x 8
30 x 24 x 8
WHs
2.3
2.9
3.8
4.2
7.0
18.0
9.9
11.8
17.7
21.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 82 of 132

C.

NEMA TYPE 9 CLASS II, GROUP E, F & G
SIZE
8x4x4
8x6x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
16 x 12 x 6
16 x 16 x 6
12 x 12 x 8
16 x 12 x 8
20 x 16 x 8
20 x 20 x 8
24 x 20 x 8
24 x 24 x 10
30 x 24 x 10
36 x 24 x 10
36 x 30 x 12
48 x 36 x 12
WHs
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.5
5.0
3.2
4.0
7.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
17.0
20.0
24.0
CONDUIT OUTLET BOXES

DESCRIPTION
4 SQ x 2 1/8 Box Steel w/ Flat Cover
4-11/16 SQ x 2 1/8 Box Steel w/ Flat Cover
x 3 1/8 Box GRFX Feraloy w/ Cover & Gasket
1 x 3 1/8 Box GRFX Feraloy w/ Cover & Gasket
x 3 1/8 Box GRFX Aluminum w/ Cover & Gasket
1 x 3 1/8 Box GRFX Aluminum w/ Cover & Gasket
WHs
0.5
0.8
2.2
2.5
2.0
2.3
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
For NEMA Type 1 units, multiply NEMA Type 12 units by 0.87.

Conduit terminations at enclosure included in hub/bushing work hour units.
Supports not included.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 83 of 132

D.
LIGHTING
19. FIXTURES
INCANDESCENT
Pendant Mount Vaportite
Stanchion Mount Vaportite
Pendant Mount Explosion Proof
Wall Mount Weatherproof
Surface Mount
Recessed
Tower Beacon
Obstruction Marker
Single fixture
Double Fixture
Strobe & Controller
WHs
1.8
2.0
2.2
1.6
1.6
2.2
4.5
3.0
4.0
40.0
NOTE
1.
Unit work hours for Tower Beacon, Obstruction Markers and Strobe &
Controller are based on installation at grade in horizontal position (cribbed).
FLUORESCENT
Ceiling or Pendant Mount
Commercial:
1-2 Tube
3-4 Tube
Industrial:
1-2 Tube
3-4 Tube
Recessed
Commercial:
1-2 Tube
3-4 Tube
Industrial:
1-2 Tube
3-4 Tube
WHs
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 84 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
19. FIXTURES cont.
MERCURY VAPOR/
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM/
METAL HALIDE
Pendant Mount Vaportite (250W Max)
Ceiling Mount Vaportite (250W Max)
Wall Mount Throughfeed Vaportite (250W Max)
Stanchion Mount Vaportite (250W Max)
Pendant Mount Explosion Proof (250W Max)
Stanchion Mount Explosion Proof (250W Max)
Low Bay (250W Max)
High Bay:
Single Lamp (400W Max)
Twin Lamp (400W Max)
Single Lamp (1000W Max)
Floodlight:
400W Max
1000W Max
Street Lighting (400W Max)
NOTES
1.
2.
For clean room fixtures, add 20%.

Fixture work hours include lamp.
WHs
2.1
2.1
2.0
2.2
3.0
3.0
2.7
3.0
4.5
4.0
4.0
7.0
4.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 85 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
20. POLES, BRACKETS & MISC
POLES
Steel and Aluminum 40 Foot Max
BRACKETS
Steel Pole Top for Floodlights
2 and 3
4
Wood Pole Mounting for Floodlights
1
2
3
4
Upsweep Steel Pole Top Mounting for Streetlight
4 Feet Long
6 feet long
8 feet long
Upsweep Steel Pole Side Mounting for Streetlight
4 Feet Long
6 feet long
8 feet long
10 feet long
Upsweep Wood Pole Mounting for Streetlight
4 Feet Long
6 feet long
8 feet long
MISC
Photo Electric Control and Mounting Bracket
WHs
12.0
WHs
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
WHs
4.0
NOTE
1.
For wood pole setting, see Pole Line section.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 86 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
21. WIRING DEVICES
RECEPTACLES
Convenience
125V, 15A, Single & Duplex
125V, 20A, Single
125/250V, 50A, Single
125/250V, 20A, Single, Explosion Proof
Power
480V, 60A, Explosion Proof
Welding
480V, 60A
Plate Cover
SWITCHES
Single Pole Toggle, 120/277V, 20A
Double Pole Toggle, 120/277V, 20A
3-Way Toggle, 120/277V, 20A
Tumbler, 120/277V, 20A, Explosion Proof
WHs
0.5
0.5
1.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
0.1
WHs
0.5
1.0
0.7
1.5
CONTACTORS
For lighting and heating NEMA 1 Enclosed, up to 600V
Amps
20
30
60
100
200
300
400
2 Pole
1.6
1.8
2.8
3.8
5.0
7.0
9.0
3 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole

1.8
2.0
2.4
2.8
2.0
2.2
2.6
3.0
3.2
3.6
-4.0
4.2
4.6
--5.5
6.0
--8.0
---10.0
----
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 87 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
21. WIRING DEVICES cont.
GANG BOXES
Iron FS and FD threaded
Item
One Hub
One Hub
1 One Hub
Two Hubs
Two Hubs
1 Two Hubs
Three Hubs
Three Hubs
1 Three Hubs
Four Hubs
Four Hubs
1 Four Hubs
1-Gang
0.60
0.70
0.85
0.80
0.95
1.15
1.00
1.20
1.45
1.20
1.45
1.75
2-Gang
0.65
0.75
0.90
0.85
1.00
1.20
1.05
1.25
1.50
-------
3-Gang
0.70
0.80
0.95
0.90
1.05
1.25
1.10
1.30
1.55
-------
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 88 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
22. EMERGENCY & EXIT LIGHTING
EMERGENCY FIXTURES
Remote
Single Head
Double Head
Power Pack
36 Watt
54 Watt
80 Watt
110 Watt
160 Watt
200 Watt
Surface Mounted
36 Watt
54 Watt
80 Watt
110 Watt
160 Watt
200 Watt
EXIT FIXTURES
1 Face
Surface Mounted
Pendant Mounted
2 Face
Surface Mounted
Pendant Mounted
Low Level
Slave Type
Surface Mounted
Recessed
Self-Powered
Surface Mounted
Recessed
WHs
0.60
0.70
0.95
1.05
1.15
1.25
1.45
1.65
1.10
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.70
1.90
WHs
0.75
0.81
0.85
0.90
0.80
0.90
0.90
1.05
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 89 of 132

D.
LIGHTING cont.
23. BOLLARD & LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
BOLLARD LIGHTS (Round or Square)
Incandescent up to 150 Watt
HID 35-50 Watt
HID 70-100 Watt
HID 150 Watt
Fluorescent
1-PL26
2-PL26
LANDSCAPE FIXTURES
Low Voltage and 120V
Recessed in ground
50 Watt
100 Watt
200 Watt
Spike Mounted
J-Box Mounted
Post Mounted Incandescent
1-Lamp Sphere
2-Lamp Sphere
4-Lamp Sphere
Post Mounted HID Fixtures
300 Watt
500 Watt
1000 Watt
36
HIGH
1.40
2.10
2.25
2.35
42
HIGH
1.45
2.10
2.30
2.45
1.20
1.30
1.65
1.75
WHs
1.67
1.77
1.97
0.40
0.99
1.57
1.72
1.97
1.97
2.36
2.96
NOTE
1.
Post-mounted landscape fixtures do not include the post.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 90 of 132

E.
GROUNDING
ITEM
WHs/EA
Copper Weld Ground Rod

(, 5/8 or diameters)
8 feet long
10 feet long
2.00
2.25
Ground Rod Clamp

(, 5/8 or diameters)
0.75
Cadweld Connections (Exothermic Welds)

2 Bus
3 Bus
4 Bus
Rail to Rail Bond (Railroad)
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Bare Copper Wire

AWG
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
KCMIL
250
300
350
400
500
600
750
WHs/LF
0.008
0.011
0.012
0.015
0.017
0.018
0.019
0.022
0.023
0.025
0.032
0.038
0.043
0.047
0.050
0.054
0.059
0.068
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
The above Cadweld connection units include mold, mold handles and charge.
The above bare copper wire units are for installation in a trench only.
The above bare copper wire units reflect the main grounding electrode system. Where short runs
are required the units must be increased. Also increase units for grounding installed other than in
trench, i.e., cable tray, exposed along building wall, etc.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 91 of 132

F.
INSTRUMENT WIRING
600V AND BELOW
Wire Stranded CU
1/C #12/14
Instrument Cable Stranded CU
PVC Unshielded w/ PVC Jacket
1-PR #16/#18
1-TR #16/#18
PVC Shielded w/ Drain Wire & PVC Jacket
1-PR #16/#18
1-TR #16/#18
Thermocouple Type JX/KX/TX
1-PR #16/#18
Wire Termination
1/C #12/#14/#16/#18/#20
1-PR #16/#18 Unshielded
1-PR #16/#18 Shielded
1-TR #16/#18 Unshielded
1-TR #16/#18 Shielded
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.009
.007
.018
.020
.014
.015
.020
.023
.015
.018
.018
.014
WHs/EA
.20
.32
.40
.40
.50
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 92 of 132

F.
INSTRUMENT WIRING cont.

MULTI-PAIR CABLE THERMOCOUPLE EXTENSION WIRE
PVC INSULATED OVERALL SHIELD PVC JACKET
20 GAUGE TWISTED PAIRS
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
10
12
16
20
24
36
50
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
78
140
173
190
251
301
355
492
680
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.360
0.470
0.490
0.540
0.620
0.650
0.730
0.840
0.970
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.022
.017
.028
.021
.030
.023
.033
.025
.040
.031
.047
.037
.049
.038
.058
.045
.064
.049
PVC INSULATED SHIELDED PAIRS OVERALL SHIELD - PVC JACKET

No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
20
24
36
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
127
234
347
417
528
588
857
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.500
0.685
0.860
0.950
1.030
1.130
1.325
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.025
.020
.033
.025
.038
.029
.047
.037
.055
.043
.058
.045
.066
.051
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 93 of 132

F.

MULTI-PAIR CABLE THERMOCOUPLE EXTENSION WIRE cont.
PVC INSULATED OVERALL SHIELD PVC INNER & OUTER JACKET
INTERLOCKED ARMOR
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
20
24
36
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
265
465
530
725
820
980
1,330
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.750
1.140
1.250
1.360
1.460
1.560
1.790
WHs/LF
Direct
Tray Burial
.033
.020
.041
.025
.051
.030
.060
.036
.070
.043
.074
.044
.086
.052
PVC INSULATED SHIELDED PAIRS - OVERALL SHIELD

PVC INNER & OUTER JACKET - INTERLOCKED ARMOR
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
24
36
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
314
457
575
682
942
1,182
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.720
0.833
1.010
1.072
1.280
1.430
WHs/LF
Direct
Tray Burial
.038
.023
.051
.030
.056
.035
.070
.043
.086
.052
.099
.060
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 94 of 132

F.

MULTI-PAIR CABLE ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT TYPE
PVC INSULATED OVERALL SHIELD PVC JACKET
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
24
36
50
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
120
221
320
381
590
820
950
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.510
0.660
0.780
0.850
1.050
1.230
1.320
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.025
.020
.030
.023
.037
.029
.045
.035
.055
.043
.063
.048
.067
.052
PVC INSULATED SHIELDED PAIRS OVERALL SHIELD - PVC JACKET

No.
Of
Pairs
4
6
8
10
12
16
20
24
36
50
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
152
216
274
325
370
495
585
670
1,120
1,190
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.520
0.660
0.720
0.805
0.850
0.960
1.085
1.210
1.400
1.540
WHs/LF
O/H
U/G
.029
.022
.033
.025
.037
.029
.040
.031
.041
.032
.052
.040
.061
.047
.063
.048
.072
.056
.082
.063
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 95 of 132

F.

MULTI-PAIR CABLE ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT TYPE cont.
PVC INSULATED OVERALL SHIELD PVC INNER & OUTER JACKET
INTERLOCKED ARMOR
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
24
36
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
279
359
446
566
697
925
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.692
0.786
0.895
1.010
1.110
1.280
WHs/LF
Direct
Tray Burial
.038
.023
.045
.026
.055
.033
.068
.040
.083
.049
.094
.056
PVC INSULATED SHIELDED PAIRS - OVERALL SHIELD

PVC INNER & OUTER JACKET - INTERLOCKED ARMOR
No.
Of
Pairs
4
8
12
16
24
36
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
304
404
563
646
856
1,106
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.720
0.833
1.010
1.072
1.280
1.430
WHs/LF
Direct
Tray Burial
.043
.025
.055
.033
.062
.037
.077
.046
.094
.056
.108
.064
NOTES
1.
U/G units are for pulling cable in conduit only.
2.
For 16-gauge wire, add 9% to 18-gauge units.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 96 of 132

G. COMMUNICATIONS
24. FIBER OPTICS
PULL/INSTALL
Up to 12-Fiber
24-Fiber
Innerduct
1
1
2
WHs/LF
.010
.014
CONNECTIONS
ST Coupling
ST/SC Anarobic Connector
Hot Melt Connector
Up to 48 Port LIU
Connector Panel 10A
24 Port Rack Mount
72 Port Rack Mount
3m Simplex Jumpers ST/ST
3m Duplex Jumpers ST/ST
WHs/EA
.05
.10
.60
1.0
.05
1.0
2.0
.10
.10
.03
.05
.08
MISCELLANEOUS
WHs/EA
Wire Management
1.0
Fanout of Fiber Outdoor 6 strands
.75
Splices
Fusion
.30
Mechanical
.40
Array Splice
1.0
Encased (buried)
1.2
Terminations
Polishing required
.40
No polishing required
.30
FDDI Dual Connectors
.80
Test
Power Meter or OTDR
.12
(Optical Time Domain Reflectometer)
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 97 of 132

G. COMMUNICATIONS cont.
25. UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE
PULL/INSTALL
4 Pair CAT 3
25 Pair CAT 3
50 Pair CAT 3
100 Pair CAT 3
4 Pair CAT 5 PVC
4 Pair CAT 5 Plenum
WHs/LF
.010
.015
.030
.040
.010
.015
BLOCKS
All 110 Block w/ connector
Protection Modules
WHs/EA
1.0
.05
JACKS
RJ 11 Jack
RJ 45 Jack
Fiber Module
WHs/EA
.10
.20
.01
PATCH PANELS
CAT 5 Patch Block
Low Profile Cable Management
WHs/EA
1.0
1.0
CONNECTORS
In-line Couplers
Male/Female Adapters
3 CAT 5 Patch Cord
25 CAT 5 Patch Cord
WHs/EA
.10
.20
.05
.10
TERMINATIONS
Crossconnects/Pair
4 Pair Terminate
25 Pair Terminate
50 Pair Terminate
100 Pair Terminate
4 Pair Continuity Test
CAT 5 Test 4 Pair LAN Certification
WHs/EA
.10
.20
.50
1.0
1.5
.12
.25
.50
.80
1.7
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 98 of 132

26. TELEPHONE EXCHANGE CABLE
TYPE PE 22 OSP CU
No.
Of
Pairs
25
50
100
200
300
600
900
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
199
340
625
1,160
1,745
3,320
3,865
TERMINATIONS
25 pair groups/binders
Approx.
O.D.
Inches
0.62
0.79
1.06
1.41
1.73
2.39
2.83
WHs/LF
O/H
.042
.049
.071
.103
.127
.184
.225
WHs/EA
.50
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 99 of 132

27. SHIELDED (COAXIAL) CABLE
PULL/INSTALL
2C Shielded 18ga
RG Coaxial
WHs/LF
.010
.012
TERMINATIONS
Coaxial
RCA Connector
WHs/EA
.10
.20
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 100 of 132

28. COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
HARDWARE
Computer Processor only
Processor and Monitor
External Modem
Desktop Scanner
External Tape Backup
Bar Code Reader, hand-held
Printers
A/B Printer Switch
Plotter
Modular Cables
WHs/EA
1.0
1.5
.60
1.0
.80
1.0
1.2
1.0
3.0
.20
NETWORK DEVICES
Network Interface Card
LAN Hub Concentrator
Multiplexer
Bridge
Router
WAN Interface Card
Repeater
WHs/EA
1.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 101 of 132

29. SURVELLIENCE EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
Video Camera
Power Bracket
Camera Control unit
Standard Mounting
Swivel Camera Mount
Tamper-proof Mounting
Automatic Pan Mounting
Add or Replace Lens
WHs/EA
.80
.50
.80
.60
.70
1.5
1.5
.40
CAMERA LENSES
Fixed
Auto Iris
Zoom
WHs/EA
.25
.60
.60
CAMERA & ENCLOSURE

Mount Indoor Light Duty
Mount Indoor Heavy Duty
Mount Outdoor Light Duty
Mount Outdoor Heavy Duty
Parapet Mount
Pole Mount 20 ft. max
Mount-corner
Pan/Tilt Indoor Heavy Duty
Pan/Tilt Indoor Light Duty
Pan/Tilt Outdoor Heavy Duty
Pan/Tilt Outdoor Light Duty
Enclosure Dome Surface Mount
Enclosure Dome Ceiling Drop-in
Enclosure Dust-tight
Heater
Blower
Sun-shroud
Wiper
WHs/EA
.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.5
4.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
4.0
3.5
1.2
1.5
1.5
.50
.25
.50
.50
MONITORS
9 Monitor
12 Monitor
15 Monitor
19 Monitor
Monitor Mounting Bracket
WHs/EA
.90
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 102 of 132

29. SURVELLIENCE EQUIPMENT cont.
SWITCHES & SEQUENCERS
4 Camera Switch, manual
8 Camera Switch, manual
4 Camera Sequencer
8 Camera Sequencer
WHs/EA
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.8
MISCELLANEOUS
Alarm Interface
Amplifier
Antenna
Coax Surge Suppressor
Console
Coupler
Digital Motion Detector
Head End Equipment
Joy Stick
Pan/Tilt Lens Zoom Control
Playback VCR
Power Supply
Programming per Channel
Satellite Receiver 4
Screen Splitter
Splitter
Time Lapse Video Recorder
Time/Date/Character Generator
Video Motion Detector
Video Multiplexer 16 Channel
Video Processor 4 Inputs
WHs/EA
6.0
1.2
8.0
.75
6.0
.60
.50
6.0
.75
2.3
1.0
2.0
.25
10.0
12.0
16.0
.60
.60
3.2
1.0
1.0
4.0
1.3
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 103 of 132

30. TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
INSTALL
Desk Phone (single or multi line)
Central Console
WHs/EA
.20
1.5
PROGRAMMING
Phone or Port*
Voice Mail per mail box
System Cards
System Cabinet
SMALL
SYSTEM
2.0
1.5
2.0
4.0
WHs/EA
LARGE
SYSTEM
3.0
1.5
4.0
8.0
* A port can be voice lines, telephone lines or misc. lines.

PAGING SYSTEM
Interface w/ phone system
WHs/EA
4.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 104 of 132

31. ACCESS CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL
CPU/Computer
Input/Output Modem
Power Supply
Batteries
Software Load
Programming
Stand-alone Card Reader/
Controller/Door Strike
Reader Controller
2-Reader Control Panel
WHs/EA
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
16.0
CARD READERS
Card Reader, post mounted
Card Reader, wall mounted
Palmprint Identifier
Proximity-card Reader unit
Remote Intercom unit
Swipe-card Reader unit
Telephone Door Security
WHs/EA
1.0
.80
5.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
10.0
8.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 105 of 132

31. ACCESS CONTROL cont.
DOOR DEVICES
Bell/Horn
Door Closer
Door Contacts
Door Lock Protector
Door Strike
Electric Door Strike
Replace existing non-electric
Install in door w/ none in place
Request-to-exit motion detector
Electric Hinge
Electric Mortise Lock, new
Electric Mortise Lock, refit
Key Switch
Motion Sensor
NEMA Enclosure
Program Cards
Relay/Sockets
Touchpad Door Lock, new
Touchpad Door Lock, refit
WHs/EA
1.0
2.0
.50
1.0
3.0
MISC
Anti-passback alarm contact
Surface mount
Flush mount
Build card database in existing software
Computer hookup and setup for use
with access program
Elevator Interface relay based driven
by controller panel
Install software DOS or Windows based
access program
Layout artwork for photo badging or logo
cards for local stamping
Perform system database backup or restoration
Print photo badging or logo cards
on local hot printer
Upload system data to remove panels
WHs/EA
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
.70
1.0
1.0
.25
.50
2.0
3.0
1.0
1.5
.05
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
.75
.05
.75
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 106 of 132

32. INDUSTRIAL FACILITY PAGE/PARTY
INSTALL
Auto Tel Interface/Coupler
Desk-Edge Station
Desk-Top Station
Flush Panel Station
Hazardous Speaker Amplifier Class I, II & III, Div. 1
Horn/Bell Signal, Standard Volume, Explosion Proof 115V, AC
Horn/Siren Signal, Resonating, Explosion Proof, 120V, AC
Indoor Ceiling Speaker
Indoor Speaker Amplifier Class I, Div. II
Indoor Wall Speaker
Indoor Wall Station Class I, B,C & D; Class II & III, Div. 1
Indoor Wall Station - Class I, Div. 2
Line Balance Class I, II & III, Div. 2
Outdoor Horn Speaker Class I & II, F & G; Class III, Div. 2
Outdoor Wall Station Class I, B, C & D; Class II & III, Div. 1
Priority Tone Generator
Weatherproof Speaker Amplifier Class I, II & III, Div. 2
Weatherproof Wall Station Class I, II & III, Div. 2
NOTE
1. For wire and terminations, see applicable section.
WHs/EA
8.0
5.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
4.0
6.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
7.0
4.0
2.0
4.0
8.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 107 of 132

33. LOCAL BUILDING PAGING SYSTEMS
INSTALL
Amplifier
Antenna
Ceiling Speaker
Music Service
Paging Speaker
Wall Speaker
WHs/EA
2.50
7.50
0.75
1.25
0.65
0.65
NOTE
1. For wire and terminations, see applicable section.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 108 of 132

34. MISCELLANEOUS
ITEM
Cabinet
Cable Support
Fire Retardant 4 x 8x Plywood
Firestopping
Labels
Open Rack 19 x 84
Splice Cabinet
Splice Case
Splice Closure
Splice Tray
Wall Mounted Patch Panel
WHS/EA
4.0
20.0
2.0
4.0
.10
2.0
2.0
1.8
1.0
1.0
.70
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
For any activities which are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson, NECA or other
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 109 of 132

H. POLE LINE
WOOD POLE SETTING CLASS II TREATED
LENGTH (FT.)
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
WHs
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
15.0
NOTE
1.
Installation units include hauling up to two (2) miles.
3 CONDUCTOR ASSEMBLY ON WOODEN CROSS ARM
5KV THRU 35KV

Tangent Pole Assembly
Corner Pole Assembly
Dead-end Pole Assembly
Single Down Guy Assembly
SINGLE
CIRCUIT
WHs
10
35
20
5
DOUBLE
CIRCUIT
WHs
15
60
30
10
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 110 of 132

H. POLE LINE cont.
POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION LINE TRANSFORMERS
KVA 1-PHASE
25
37
50
75
100
167
250
333
500
WHs
10
12
15
18
22
26
32
40
52
KVA 3-PHASE
15
30
45
75
112
150
225
300
500
20
30
34
38
43
48
54
60
72
NOTE
1.
Above units include necessary brackets and fasteners to mount transformers to existing
pole.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 111 of 132

H. POLE LINE cont.
WIRE STRINGING 5KV THRU 35KV ( 25 FOOT HEIGHT)
SINGLE ALUMINUM CONDUCTOR, STEEL REINFORCED (ACSR) BARE
AMPS
140
185
240
275
315
360
455
530
585
660
725
785
845
905
950
955
995
1025
1175
1270
1360
1540
1600
1670
1755
SIZE
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
266.8
336.4
397.5
477.0
556.5
636.0
715.0
795.0
874.5
900.0
954.0
1033.5
1272.0
1431.0
1590.0
2034.0
2167.0
2312.0
2515.0
STRANDING
6/1
6/1
6/1
6/1
6/1
6/1
26/7
26/7
26/7
26/7
26/7
26/7
26/7
26/7
54/7
54/7
54/7
54/7
54/19
54/19
54/19
72/7
72/7
76/19
76/19
WT.
Per
1,000
LF
57
91
145
183
231
291
367
463
547
657
766
875
984
1,094
1,126
1,158
1,229
1,330
1,635
1,840
2,044
2,162
2,302
2,526
2,749
WHs
Per
LF
.013
.014
.016
.018
.020
.022
.023
.025
.027
.029
.031
.034
.037
.040
.041
.042
.045
.049
.060
.068
.076
.080
.085
.093
.101
WT.
Per
Mile
301
480
766
966
1,220
1,536
1,938
2,445
2,888
3,469
4,044
4,620
5,196
5,776
5,945
6,114
6,489
7,022
8,633
9,715
10,792
11,415
12,155
13,337
14,515
WHs
Per
Mile
69
74
84
95
106
116
121
132
143
153
164
180
195
211
216
222
238
259
317
359
401
422
449
491
533
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS:
35 foot multiply by 1.02
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 112 of 132

H. POLE LINE cont.
PRE-ASSEMBLED AERIAL CABLE
THREE TWISTED 1/C STRANDED CU SHIELDED WITH MESSENGER
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
600V
.015
.028
.032
.036
.040
.048
.056
.064
.072
WHs/LF
5KV
.017
.031
.035
.040
.044
.053
.062
.070
.079
KCMIL
250
350
500
750
.079
.086
.100
.120
.087
.095
.110
.132
15KV
------.038
.043
.048
.058
.067
.077
.086
.095
.103
.120
.144
MESSENGER HANGER ASSEMBLY

ITEM
Tangent Pole
Corner Pole
Dead-end Pole
Tee Splice (600V)
Straight Splice (600V)
WHs
0.5
2.0
1.5
2.7
1.7
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 113 of 132

H. POLE LINE cont.
PRIMARY & SECONDARY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PRIMARY
Pole Top Airbreak Switch TPST with Operating Mechanism & Rod
Enclosed Disconnect Switches
Open Disconnect Switches
Enclosed Cutouts One Shot
Enclosed Cutouts Two Shot
Enclosed Cutouts Three Shot
Open Cutouts One Shot
Open Cutouts Two Shot
Open Cutouts Three Shot
Oil Circuit Reclosers Single Phase (70 pounds)
Oil Circuit Reclosers Three Phase (315 pounds)
Heavy Duty Oil Circuit Reclosers Single Phase (170 pounds)
Heavy Duty Oil Circuit Reclosers Three Phase (700 pounds)
Oil Switch Single-Phase Remote Control
Oil Switch One Single-Phase Manual Gang Operated
Oil Switch Two Single-Phase Manual Gang Operated
Oil Switch Three Single-Phase Manual Gang Operated
Oil Switch Remote Control
Oil Switch Manual Operated
Lightning Arresters
WHs
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
10
18
14
26
15
15
30
60
60
70
5
SECONDARY
Fuse Cutouts
Lightning Arresters
3
3
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 114 of 132

I.
ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING

CONTROLLERS UP TO 650 F (NEMA 4 & 7)
TYPE
Single Thermostat
Dual Thermostat
Thermostat Contactor (3-Pole)
Contactor (3-Pole) 30/50/75 Amp
WHs
4
5
5
4
HEATING CABLE SELF REGULATING CU BUS WIRE

WHs/LF
Div-2 Div-2
ORDINARY
N-Haz (1)
(2)
2-16 AWG, 150 F Max, 120/240 VAC, 3-10W
.040
.045
.050
2-14 AWG, 250 F Max, 120/240 VAC, 5-20W
.042
.047
.052
2-16 AWG, 225 F Max, 240 VAC, 10-15W
.040
.045
.050
2-14 AWG, 225 F Max, 120/240 VAC, 15-20W
.042
.047
.052
2-14 AWG, 300 F Max, 208/240/277 VAC, 5-20W .042
.047
.052
Div-1
.052
.054
.056
.058
.060
LONGLINE
2-10 AWG, 150F Max, 240 VAC, 2-9W
.062
.045
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
N-Haz unit Cable with Jacket only.

Div-2 (1) unit Cable with Jacket and Shield.
Div-2 (2) unit Cable with Jacket, Shield and Jacket.
Div-1 unit Cable with Jacket, Braid and Alloy Sheath.
.050
.055
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 115 of 132

I.
ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING cont.

SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE ACCESSORIES
ORDINARY
PWR Conn. Kit
Without JB
Non-Shielded Cables
Shield and Shield/Jacket Cables
With JB
Non-Shielded Cables
Dual Entry with JB
Non-Shielded Cables
Splice Kit Tee
With ENCL
Non-Shielded Cables
With ENCL
Non-Shielded Cables
With ENCL
Non-Shielded Cables
With ENCL
Non-Shielded Cables
End Seal Kit (All Cables)
Gland Kit to seal all entries of Shield/Jacket
Cables for installation in Division 1 Area
LONGLINE
PWR Conn. Kit Assembly for 3 Conductor
Self Regulating Heating Cable
Non-Shielded Cables
*Assembly includes:
1-PWR Box
2-Phase Change over Box
1-End Box
PWR Conn. Splices End Seal Kits for
1 Conductor Self Regulating Heating Cable
WHs
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.7
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.0
0.3
1.2
6.0
7.0
Use ORDINARY units
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 116 of 132

I. ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING cont.
CONTROL DEVICES SELF REGULATING AND HI-TEMP HEATING CABLES
THERMOSTAT
Ambient or Line Sensing Non-Adjustable 40 F NEMA 4X
Ambient Sensing Adjustable 15 to 140 F NEMA 4X
Line Sensing Adjustable
25 to 325 F NEMA 4X
15 to 140 F NEMA 4X
75 to 325 F NEMA 7,9
50 to 1000 F NEMA 4,7,9
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
CONTACTOR
3P-40A 480V NEMA 4X
3P-40A 480V NEMA 7
3P-100A 480V NEMA 4X
4.0
4.0
4.0
WHs
3.0
3.0
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 117 of 132

J. CATHODIC PROTECTION
GRAPHITE ANODES
BARE
(with 5 FT. of #8 HMW lead wire)
ANODE
SIZE
3 x 30
3 x 60
4 x 40
4 x 80
WT.
LBS.
13
25
32
63
WHs per
ANODE
2.3
3.1
3.8
5.4
NOTE WHs for bare anodes include coke breeze backfill.

COKE BREEZE BACKFILL DATA
ANODE
SIZE
3 x 30
3 x 60
4 x 40
4 x 80
HOLE
SIZE
VERT.
12 x 54
12 x 84
16 x 64
16 x 104
VOL.
CFT.
3.7
5.7
7.6
12.2
WT.
LBS.
170
260
350
560
PRE-PACKAGED IN STEEL CAN

ANODE
SIZE
3 x 30
3 x 60
4 x 40
4 x 80
OVERALL
DIMENSION
8 x 54
8 x 84
10 x 54
10 x 96
WT.
LBS.
100
155
150
260
WHs per
ANODE
1.5
2.3
3.1
4.6
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 118 of 132

J. CATHODIC PROTECTION cont.
DURICHLOR 51 ANODES
BARE
ANODE
TYPE
B
C
CD
CDD
D
M
J
E
SM
ANODE
SIZE
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
2 x 60
2 x 60
3 x 36
3 x 60
4 x 60
WT.
LBS.
12
25
26
25
44
60
80
110
220
WHs per
ANODE
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.8
3.8
3.1
4.6
7.7
NOTE WHs for bare anodes include coke breeze backfill.

COKE BREEZE BACKFILL DATA
ANODE
TYPE
B
C
CD
CDD
D
M
J
E
SM
ANODE
SIZE
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
2 x 60
2 x 60
3 x 36
3 x 60
4 x 60
HOLE
SIZE
VERT.
8 x 84
8 x 84
8 x 84
8 x 84
10 x 84
10 x 84
12 x 54
12 x 84
16 x 84
VOL.
CFT.
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
3.9
3.9
3.7
5.7
10.0
WT.
LBS.
120
120
120
120
180
180
170
260
460
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 119 of 132

DURICHLOR 51 ANODES cont.
ANODE
TYPE
B
C
CD
CDD
D
M
J
E
SM
ANODE
SIZE
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
1 x 60
2 x 60
2 x 60
3 x 36
3 x 60
4 x 60
OVERALL
DIMENSION
8 x 96
8 x 96
8 x 96
8 x 96
8 x 96
8 x 96
8 x 48
8 x 96
12 x 96
WT.
LBS.
174
185
187
188
206
217
180
275
410
WHs per
ANODE
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
3.1
3.1
2.3
3.8
6.2
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 120 of 132

MAGNESIUM ANODES
(with 10 FT. of #12 or #10 TW - OR - #8, #6 or #4 HMW lead wire)
DOW GALVOMAG
ANODE
WT.
LBS.
3
5
9
17
20
32
48
ANODE
DIMENSION
3 x 3 x 4
3 x 3 x 7
3 x 3 x 13
3 x 3 x 25
2 x 2 x 60
5 x 5 x 21
5 x 5 x 31
OVERALL
DIMENSION
6 x 6
6 x 9
6 x 15
6 x 28
5 x 64
8 x 23
8 x 34
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
9
14
23
42
68
70
96
WHs per
ANODE
0.8
0.8
1.5
2.3
3.1
3.8
4.6
OVERALL
DIMENSION
6 x 6
6 x 9
6 x 15
6 x 28
5 x 64
8 x 23
10 x 18
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
9
14
23
42
68
70
96
WHs per
ANODE
0.8
0.8
1.5
2.3
3.1
3.8
4.6
H-1 ALLOY GRADE I

ANODE
WT.
LBS.
3
5
9
17
20
32
50
ANODE
DIMENSION
3 x 3 x 4
3 x 3 x 7
3 x 3 x 13
3 x 3 x 25
2 x 2 x 60
5 x 5 x 21
8 D x 15
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 121 of 132

ZINC ANODES
(with 10 FT. of HMW lead wire)
SIZE: 1.4 x 1.4 x 60 / WT.: 33 LBS.
OVERALL DIMENSION: 4 x 68
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
55
56
57
59
60
61
62
65
WHs per
ANODE
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.7
2.7
2.7
KCMIL
250
300
350
67
68
70
3.1
3.1
3.1
SIZE: 2 x 2 x 45 / WT.: 45 LBS.

AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
90
91
92
94
95
96
97
100
WHs per
ANODE
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
3.1
3.1
3.1
KCMIL
250
300
350
102
103
105
3.5
3.5
3.5
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 122 of 132

ZINC ANODES cont.
(with 10 FT. of HMW lead wire)
SIZE: 2 x 2 x 60 / WT.: 60 LBS.
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
120
121
122
124
125
126
127
130
WHs per
ANODE
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.5
3.5
3.5
KCMIL
250
300
350
132
133
135
3.8
3.8
3.8
SIZE: 4 x 4 x 36 / WT.: 150 LBS.

AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
OVERALL
WT.
LBS.
220
221
222
224
225
226
227
230
WHs per
ANODE
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
5.0
5.0
5.0
KCMIL
250
300
350
232
233
235
5.4
5.4
5.4
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 123 of 132

ALUMINUM ANODES
BARE
(GALVALUM with CORE TYPE R)
ANODE
NO.
G-17
G-26
G-30
G-60-2
G-60-1
G-60
G-90-2
G-90-1
G-90
G-120-2
G-120-1
G-120
G-240-1
G-240
ANODE
DIMENSION
2 x 2 x 36
2 x 2 x 60
3 x 3 x 34
4 x 4 x 38
5 x 5 x 24
7 x 7 x 12
4 x 4 x 57
5 x 5 x 36
7 x 7 x 18
5 x 5 x 48
7 x 7 x 24
10 x 10 x 12
7 x 7 x 48
10 x 10 x 24
WT.
LBS.
17
26
30
60
60
60
90
90
90
120
120
120
240
240
WHs per
ANODE
1.5
2.3
2.3
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.6
4.6
4.6
6.2
6.2
NOTE These anodes are for non-burial applications, therefore do not require backfill.
ANODE NOTE
1.
All Anode work hours are based on typical installation at or near the surface. For deep groundbed
installation add work hours as required by depth. See Means, Richardson or other recognized
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 124 of 132

RECTIFIERS
NON-HAZARDOUS
AIR COOLED 1/C, 115V
BRIDGE TYPE SELENIUM
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
8
4
8
12
8
22
8
50
8
100
8
120
12
4
12
12
12
22
12
50
12
100
12
120
18
4
18
12
18
22
18
50
18
100
18
120
24
4
24
12
24
22
24
50
24
100
24
120
30
4
30
12
30
22
30
50
30
100
30
120
WT.
LBS.
70
80
95
130
230
240
75
85
100
140
270
290
80
90
110
160
290
310
85
95
130
230
320
370
90
100
140
260
380
400
PAD
MOUNTED
1.5
1.9
2.3
3.1
5.4
5.8
1.9
1.9
2.3
3.1
6.2
6.9
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.8
6.5
7.3
1.9
2.3
3.1
5.4
7.3
8.1
1.9
2.3
3.1
6.2
8.8
9.6
POLE
MOUNTED
3.8
4.2
5.0
6.9
12.3
13.5
4.2
4.6
5.4
7.7
14.6
16.1
4.2
5.0
5.8
8.5
15.8
17.3
4.6
5.0
6.9
12.3
17.3
21.5
5.0
5.4
7.7
13.8
20.4
22.3
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 125 of 132

RECTIFIERS cont.
NON-HAZARDOUS cont.
AIR COOLED 3/C, 460V
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
12
6
12
12
12
24
12
50
12
100
12
200
18
6
18
12
18
24
18
50
18
100
18
200
24
6
24
12
24
24
24
50
24
100
24
200
32
6
32
12
32
24
32
50
32
100
32
200
40
6
40
12
40
24
40
50
40
100
40
200
WT.
LBS.
110
115
130
160
215
465
120
125
145
200
285
505
125
130
185
235
315
530
130
135
190
260
315
530
135
145
200
285
390
615
PAD
MOUNTED
2.7
2.7
3.1
3.8
5.0
10.8
2.7
3.1
3.5
4.6
6.5
11.5
3.1
3.1
4.2
5.8
7.3
12.3
3.1
3.1
4.2
6.2
8.1
12.7
3.1
3.5
4.6
6.5
9.2
13.8
POLE
MOUNTED
5.8
6.2
6.9
8.8
11.5
25.0
6.5
6.9
7.7
10.8
15.4
27.3
6.9
6.9
10.0
12.7
16.9
28.5
6.9
7.3
10.4
13.8
19.2
29.6
7.3
7.7
10.4
15.4
21.1
31.5
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 126 of 132

RECTIFIERS cont.
NON-HAZARDOUS cont.
OIL IMMERSED - 1/C, 115V
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
8
4
8
12
8
22
8
50
8
100
8
120
12
4
12
12
12
22
12
50
12
100
12
120
18
4
18
12
18
22
18
50
18
100
18
120
24
4
24
12
24
22
24
50
24
100
24
120
30
4
30
12
30
22
30
50
30
100
30
120
WT.
LBS.
150
165
180
200
375
460
155
170
185
285
400
480
160
175
195
300
435
510
170
180
210
335
470
520
175
185
220
380
520
550
PAD
MOUNTED
3.5
3.8
4.2
4.6
9.6
11.2
3.5
3.8
4.2
6.5
10.0
11.5
3.8
4.2
4.6
6.9
10.4
11.9
3.8
4.2
5.0
7.7
11.2
12.7
4.2
4.2
5.0
8.8
11.9
13.5
POLE
MOUNTED
8.1
8.8
9.6
10.8
20.4
23.5
8.5
9.2
10.0
15.4
21.5
25.0
8.5
9.6
10.4
16.1
23.5
26.1
9.2
9.6
11.2
18.1
25.4
28.8
9.6
10.0
11.9
20.4
28.1
30.8
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 127 of 132

RECTIFIERS cont.
NON-HAZARDOUS cont.
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
12
6
12
12
12
24
12
50
12
100
12
200
18
6
18
12
18
24
18
50
18
100
18
200
24
6
24
12
24
24
24
50
24
100
24
200
32
6
32
12
32
24
32
50
32
100
32
200
40
6
40
12
40
24
40
50
40
100
40
200
WT.
LBS.
170
175
190
265
420
710
180
185
205
290
465
850
185
190
226
325
490
900
190
200
235
365
610
950
195
205
250
455
630
1,025
PAD
MOUNTED
3.8
3.8
4.2
5.8
9.2
15.0
3.8
4.2
4.6
6.5
10.4
16.5
4.2
4.2
5.0
7.3
10.8
16.9
4.2
4.6
5.4
8.1
13.5
19.2
4.2
4.6
5.8
10.0
13.8
20.8
POLE
MOUNTED
8.8
9.2
10.0
13.8
21.9
35.8
9.2
9.6
10.8
15.0
24.2
38.5
9.6
10.0
11.9
16.9
25.8
40.4
10.0
10.4
12.3
19.2
31.9
45.4
10.4
10.8
13.8
23.1
32.7
49.2
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 128 of 132

RECTIFIERS cont.
EXPLOSION PROOF
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
8
4
8
12
8
22
8
50
8
100
8
120
12
4
12
12
12
22
12
50
12
100
12
120
18
4
18
12
18
22
18
50
18
100
18
120
24
4
24
12
24
22
24
50
24
100
24
120
30
4
30
12
30
22
30
50
30
100
30
120
WT.
LBS.
210
225
240
260
475
560
215
230
245
345
500
580
220
235
255
360
535
610
230
240
260
395
570
620
235
245
260
440
620
650
PAD
MOUNTED
3.8
4.2
4.2
5.0
10.0
11.9
3.8
4.2
4.6
6.9
10.4
12.3
3.8
4.2
4.6
7.3
10.8
13.1
4.2
4.2
5.0
8.1
11.9
13.8
4.2
4.6
5.4
8.8
12.3
14.6
POLE
MOUNTED
8.5
9.2
10.0
11.2
21.1
25.0
8.8
9.6
10.5
15.8
22.3
26.1
9.2
10.0
11.2
16.5
24.2
29.2
9.6
10.0
11.9
18.5
26.1
30.8
10.0
10.4
12.3
20.8
28.8
33.1
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 129 of 132

RECTIFIERS cont.
EXPLOSION PROOF cont.
MAX DC OUTPUT
VOLTS
AMPS
12
6
12
12
12
24
12
50
12
100
12
200
18
6
18
12
18
24
18
50
18
100
18
200
24
6
24
12
24
24
24
50
24
100
24
200
32
6
32
12
32
24
32
50
32
100
32
200
40
6
40
12
40
24
40
50
40
100
40
200
WT.
LBS.
230
235
250
325
520
835
240
245
265
350
565
975
245
250
286
385
590
1,025
250
260
295
425
710
1,075
255
265
310
515
730
1,150
PAD
MOUNTED
3.8
4.2
4.6
6.2
9.6
15.8
4.2
4.2
4.6
6.5
10.8
17.3
4.2
4.6
5.4
7.7
11.2
17.7
4.6
4.6
5.4
8.5
13.8
20.0
4.6
5.0
6.2
10.0
14.2
21.5
POLE
MOUNTED
9.2
9.6
10.4
14.2
22.7
37.3
10.0
10.0
11.2
15.8
25.0
40.0
10.0
10.4
12.3
17.3
26.5
42.3
10.4
10.8
12.7
19.6
32.7
47.3
10.8
11.2
14.2
23.5
33.5
50.8
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 130 of 132

CATHODIC PROTECTION CABLE
1/C STRANDED CU WITH HMW POLYETHYLENE INSULATION
AND JACKET
AWG
8
6
4
2
1
1/0
2/0
4/0
DC
RESISTANCE
PER 1,000 FT.
@ 25 C
0.6540
0.4100
0.2590
0.1620
0.1290
0.1020
0.0811
0.0509
WHs/LF
.011
.013
.015
.018
.020
.022
.025
.030
KCMIL
250
300
350
0.0431
0.0360
0.0308
.034
.037
.039
NOTE
1.
For Cadweld Connections:

Cable-to-Cable, use 3.0 WH/EA.
Cable-to-Pipe, use 3.0 WH/EA.
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 131 of 132

K. METRIC CONVERSIONS
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR AREAS
UNITED STATES
AWG
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
AREA
CIRCULAR
MILS
1,620
2,580
4,110
6,530
10,380
16,510
26,240
41,740
52,620
66,360
83,690
105,600
133,100
167,800
211,600
KCMIL
250
250,000
300
300,000
350
350,000
400
400,000
500
500,000
600
600,000
700
700,000
750
750,000
EUROPEAN
(CLOSEST TO U.S. STANDARD)
AREA
SQ. MM
0.82
1.30
2.08
3.30
5.25
8.36
13.29
21.14
26.65
33.61
42.39
53.49
67.42
85.00
107.19
SIZE
SQ. MM
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
----35
50
----70
95
AREA
CIRCULAR
MILS
1,480
1,974
2,961
4,935
7,896
11,844
19,740
31,584
49,350
----69,090
98,700
----138,180
187,530
126.64
151.97
177.30
202.63
253.29
303.95
354.60
379.93
120
150
----185
240
300
---------
236,880
296,100
----365,190
473,760
592,200
---------
000 310 1600

April 2000
Page 132 of 132

K. METRIC CONVERSIONS cont.
CONDUIT INSIDE DIAMETERS
UNITED STATES
TRADE
SIZE
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
INCHES
0.622
0.824
1.049
1.380
1.610
2.067
2.569
3.068
3.548
4.026
5.047
6.065
CABLE TRAY
WIDTH
INCHES
6
12
18
24
30
36
MM
150
300
450
600
750
900
RUNG SPACE
INCHES
MM
9
230
RADIUS
INCHES
MM
24
600
EUROPEAN
MM
15.8
20.9
26.6
35.0
40.9
52.5
62.7
77.9
90.1
102.3
128.2
154.1
TRADE
SIZE
11
16
21
29
36
42
-------
MM
16.4
19.9
25.5
34.2
44.0
51.0
-------
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 1 of 12
CONTROL SYSTEMS UNIT WORK HOURS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS
Page 2
B. CONTROL SYSTEMS PANELS & RACKS
Page 7
C. TUBING & FITTINGS
Page 9
D. MOUNTING BRACKETS, STANDS & WEATHERPROOF HOUSING
Page 12
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 2 of 12

A. FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS
Calibrate/
Install Test
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 6)
(note 8)
(note 7)
Loop
Check Total
Bulk
Stand
Reqd? Reqd?
CATEGORY
(note 1) (note 2) (note 3)
ANALYTICAL DEVICES
AC
Analyzer Controller
AE
Analyzer Element (Corrosion Coupon)
AE/AT CO2 Analyzer
AE/AT Gas Analyzer (Chromatograph, IR, etc.)
AE/AT Area Gas Monitor (Comb., Toxic, etc.)
AE/AT pH Analyzer
AE/AT Dissolved Oxygen
AE/AT Capacity Conductivity Probe (Xmtr)
AI
Analyzer Indicator (Receiver Gauge)
AT
Analyzer Transmitter
CE
Conductivity Element
DE
Density Element
DT
Density Transmitter
ME
Moisture Element
MT
Moisture Transmitter
VE
Viscosity Element
VT
Viscosity Transmitter
8.0
3.0
12.0
12.0
4.0
12.0
12.0
8.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.5
4.0
5.0
--15.0
15.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
3.0
1.0
6.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
13.6
3.6
28.2
28.2
11.2
23.2
23.2
12.2
4.6
10.6
5.6
9.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
4.1
6.6
A/C
N
P/C
P/C
P/C
P/C
P/C
C
C
P/C
N
N
C
N
P/C
N
P/C
Y
N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y
Y/N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
FLOW DEVICES
FC
Flow Controller
FE
Flow Element (Coriolis Flowmeter)
FE
Flow Element (Magnetic Flowmeter)
FE
Flow Element (Orifice Plate)
FE
Flow Element (Pitot Tube/Annubar)
FE
Flow Element (Positive Displacement)
FE
Flow Element (Turbine Meter)
FE
Flow Element (Venturi)
FE
Flow Element (Vortex Flowmeter)
FG
Flow Glass
FI
Flow Indicator (Process Rotameter)
FI
Flow Indicator (Paddle Type)
FI
Flow Indicator (Receiver Gauge)
FQ
Flow Totalizer
FS
Flow Switch
FT
Flow Transmitter (Elec. Transducer)
FT
Flow Transmitter (D/P Cell)
8.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
--1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
4.0
2.0
6.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
12.6
4.6
4.6
3.6
3.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
2.6
3.6
4.6
4.6
11.6
8.6
6.6
10.6
A/P/C
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
C
C
P/C
C
P/C
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y/N
Y/N
Y
Y/N
Y/N
(note 4) (note 5)
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 3 of 12

A. FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS cont.
Calibrate/
Install Test
CATEGORY
Loop
Check Total
Bulks Stand
Reqd? Reqd?
(note 4) (note 5)
LEVEL DEVICES
LC
Level Controller
(note 6) LG
Level Gauge
LI
Level Indicator (Float or Target)
LI
Level Indicator (Receiver Gauge)
LS
Level Switch (Float or Probe)
(note 6) LT
Level Transmitter (Displacer)
LT
Level Transmitter (D/P)
LT
Level Transmitter (Radar)
8.0
2.0
10.0
3.0
10.0
2.0
4.0
16.0
3.0
--4.0
1.0
6.0
4.0
6.0
4.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
11.6
2.6
14.6
4.6
16.6
6.6
10.6
20.6
A/P/C
N
P
C
P/C
C
P/C
C
Y
N
Y
Y/N
Y
N
Y/N
N
PRESSURE DEVICES
PC
Pressure Controller
PDI
Pressure Differential Indicator
PDIS Pressure Diff. Indicating Switch
PDS
Pressure Differential Switch
PDT
Pressure Differential Transmitter
PI
Pressure Indicator (Local Gauge)
PI
Pressure Indicator (Receiver Gauge)
PS
Pressure Switch
(note 6) PSE
Press. Safety Element (Rupt. Disc)
(note 6) PSV
Pressure Safety Valve
PT
Pressure Transmitter
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
5.0
3.0
5.0
2.0
6.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
6.0
5.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
13.6
7.6
9.6
6.6
10.6
4.1
4.6
6.6
3.6
8.6
9.6
A/P/C
P
P/C
P/C
P/C
P
C
P/C
N
N
P/C
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y/N
Y/N
N
N
Y
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
TC
Temperature Controller
TE
Temperature Element
TI
Temperature Indicator (Gauge)
TI
Temperature Indicator (Rec. Gauge)
TS
Temperature Switch
TT
Temperature Transmitter
(note 6) TW
Thermowell
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
8.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
2.0
3.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
--4.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
14.6
6.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
6.6
2.6
7.6
A/P/C
N
N
C
C
C
N
C
Y
N
N
Y/N
Y/N
Y
N
N
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 4 of 12

Calibrate/
Install Test
CATEGORY
MISCELLANEOUS
(note 6) *CV
Control Valve
*R
Recorder
(note 9) *Y
I/P Transducer
(note 9) *Y
Solenoid Valve
AE
Smoke Detector
BE
Burner Element
BS
Burner Switch
(note 6) CVC
Conservation Vents
HC
Hand Controller (Manual Loader)
HS
Hand Switch
SE
Speed Element
SS
Speed Switch
ST
Speed Transmitter
VS
Vibration Switch
WC
Weight Controller
WE
Weight Element (Cell)
WI
Weight Indicator
WT
Weight Transmitter
XI
Receiver Gauge (Elec. Or Pneu.)
XIT
Torque Indicator Transmitter
(note 9) ZI
Position Indicator
(note 9) ZS
Limit Switch
(note 9) ZT
Position Transmitter
Loop
Check Total
2.0
8.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
3.0
8.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.5
2.5
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
--1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Bulks Stand
Reqd? Reqd?
(note 4) (note 5)
6.6
12.1
7.1
4.6
6.6
4.1
4.6
2.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
6.1
6.1
6.1
12.6
10.6
8.6
8.6
4.6
9.6
5.6
5.6
8.6
A
A/P/C
C
C
C
N
C
N
A/C
A/C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A/C
C
N
C
C
N
Y
Y/N
Y/N
N
N
Y/N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y/N
Y
N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
N
N
N
Y/N
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 5 of 12

FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENT NOTES
1.
All work hour units in the Install column include unload, storage, specification verification,
handling to erection site and installation of device, unless otherwise indicated by note 6.
2.
All work hour units in the Calibrate/Test column are for initial bench calibration of non-smart
instrument devices. For factory calibrated smart instrument devices, an allowance of one (1)
work hour should be used to verify factory calibration.
3.
Loop Check work hours are assigned to all devices in an effort to accumulate total work hours to
check an entire control loop, even though some devices dont actually require wiring, tubing or a
control check.
4.
For the Bulks Reqd? column, use the following legend:

A = Air Supply Bulks
P = Process Bulks
C = Conduit/ Field Wiring (to Field Junction Box)
N = None required
To determine labor work hours for Bulks installation, refer to either Fluor Daniel Standard
Assemblies and/or specific client approved Instrument Installation Details.
5.
For Stand Reqd? column, use the following legend:

Y = Yes
N = No
Y/N = Dependent upon installation method see Instrument Installation Details or consult
Control Systems lead engineer.
6.
The handling to erection site and installation labor for this in-line device is included in the
Piping Account (section 1500). All other activities for the Install column (see note 1) are included
in the Control Systems account (section 1700).
7.
This device (D/P Cell Flow Transmitter) should be used with the following Flow Elements (FEs):
FE Orifice Plate
FE Pitot Tube/Annubar
FE - Venturi
8.
This device (Flow Transmitter Electronic Transducer) should be used with the following Flow
Elements (FEs):
FE Coriolis Meter
FE Magnetic Flowmeter
FE Positive Displacement Flowmeter
FE Turbine Meter
FE Vortex Flowmeter
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 6 of 12

FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENT NOTES cont.
9.
These installation hours are for individually shipped components. Typically these devices are
furnished pre-mounted to an associated Control Valve, therefore no installation labor is required.
To verify installation requirements, consult Control Systems lead engineer.
10. Any supports required are not included.

11. For any activities that are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson or other recognized
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 7 of 12

B. CONTROL SYSTEMS PANELS & RACKS
CONTROL ROOM EQUIPMENT (DCS & PLCs)
DCS
Equipment Racks or Panels (Haul/Set)
Panelboard or Console in Main Control Room (Haul/Set)
Marshalling Rack Components (Rails/Terminals Install)
Interconnecting Cables (Marshalling Rack to DCS) 30 feet - pulled & terminated:
8 pair cable
Ribbon cable w/ prefab connectors
Loop check (per DCS/RTU/PLC point)
WHs/EA
20
16
.06
8
2
0.6
PLCs
PLC Components (Haul/Set)
WHs/EA
16
LOCAL PANELS
CATEGORY
Annunciator
Local Instrument Panel (Haul/Set)
Local Field Junction Box (Haul/Set)
Local Power Panel (Haul/Set)
WHs/EA
0.6 per Point/Window
20
In Electrical Section 1600
In Electrical Section 1600
PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS (CONTROL ROOM OR LOCAL PANELS)

(see note 1)
Calibrate/
Install Test
Loop
Check
CATEGORY
(note 2) (note 3) (note 4) Total
FLOW DEVICES
FIC
Flow Indicator Controller
6.0
4.0
0.6
10.6
LEVEL DEVICES
LA
Level Alarm
LI
Level Indicator
1.0
4.0
1.0
4.0
0.6
0.6
2.6
8.6
PRESSURE DEVICES
PA
Pressure Alarm
PIC
Pressure Indicator Controller
PS
Pressure Switch
1.0
6.0
3.0
1.0
3.0
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.6
9.6
4.6
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
TA
Temperature Alarm
TS
Temperature Switch
1.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
0.6
0.6
2.6
4.6
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 8 of 12

B. CONTROL SYSTEMS PANELS & RACKS cont.
PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS (CONTROL ROOM OR LOCAL PANELS) cont.
(see note 1)
Calibrate/
Install Test
Loop
Check
CATEGORY
(note 2) (note 3) (note 4) Total
MISC
HIC
II
IS
IT
KC
KI
KS
XA
XI
XIC
XS
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
4.0
6.0
3.0
Hand Indicator Controller (Manual Loader)

Current Indicator
Current Switch
Current Transmitter
Time Controller
Electronic Timer
Timer Switch
Unclassified Alarm
Unclassified Indicator
Unclassified Indicator Controller
Unclassified Switch
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
6.6
5.6
3.6
3.6
2.6
8.6
10.6
4.6
CONTROL SYSTEMS PANEL & RACK NOTES

1.
Panel mounted devices are typically pre-installed by the panel vendor, therefore no installation
labor is required. To verify installation requirements, consult Control Systems lead engineer. If
installation is required, see note 2.
2.
All work hour units in the Install column include unload, storage, handling to erection site, panel
cutout and installation of device.
3.
All work hour units in the Calibrate/Test column are for initial bench calibration of non-smart
instrument devices. For factory calibrated smart instrument devices, an allowance of one (1)
work hour should be used to verify factory calibration.
4.
Loop Check work hours are assigned to all devices in an effort to accumulate total work hours to
check an entire control loop, even though some devices dont actually require wiring, tubing or a
control check.
5.
6.
For any activities that are not included in this section, see Means, Richardson or other recognized
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 9 of 12

C. TUBING & FITTINGS
AIR SUPPLY BULKS
PIPE
WHs/LF
0.10
0.20
thru 1
1
FITTINGS - THREADED
ELLS and COUPLINGS
thru
1
1
TEES and UNIONS
thru
1
1
CAPS
thru
1
1
NIPPLES (TBE)
x 3
x 3
x 3
1 x 3
1 x 3
SWAGE NIPPLES
x
x
1 x
1 x 1
PLUGS
thru
1
1
VALVES
thru
1
1
MISC
Purge Rotameter
Air Filter/Regulator
WHs/EA
0.70
0.90
1.30
1.05
1.35
1.95
0.35
0.45
0.65
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.02
0.04
0.05
1.00
1.20
1.80
0.70
0.70
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 10 of 12

C. TUBING & FITTINGS cont.
PROCESS BULKS
TUBING (note 3)
WHs/LF
COPPER
SS
0.10
0.14
0.12
0.16
0.14
0.18
TUBING FITTINGS (Brass or SS)

FEMALE & MALE CONNECTORS
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
OD x NPT
UNIONS
TEES
WHs/EA
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.17
0.19
0.19
0.20
0.18
0.19
0.22
0.21
0.23
0.29
TUBING VALVES (Brass or SS)

TUBE ENDS, MNPT x TUBE, or FNPT x TUBE
x
x
x
x
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.27
MANIFOLDS
MANIFOLD/3-VALVE -THRD
MANIFOLD/3-VALVE -THRD x FLGD
WHs/EA
1.25
1.00
PRE-INSULATED TUBE BUNDLES

(1) OD COPPER
(1) OD STAINLESS
(1) OD COPPER
(1) OD STAINLESS
(1) COPPER & (1) STAINLESS
WHs/LF
0.09
0.11
0.11
0.13
0.18
0.22
0.26
WHs/EA
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 11 of 12

C. TUBING & FITTINGS cont.
PROCESS BULKS cont.
TUBING RACEWAY & FITTINGS
1 TUBE TRACK
2 TUBE TRACK
4 TUBE TRACK
WHs/LF
0.30
0.40
0.60
TUBING & FITTING NOTES

1.
2.
Threaded fittings for Air Supply Bulks include handling, cutting, threading and joint make-up.
3.
Work hour units per LF for Tubing are for wall thickness up to and including 0.049. For heavier
wall tubing, increase work hour units proportionally.
4.
Tubing fittings for Process Bulks include handling, cutting, deburring and joint make-up.
5.
6.
000 310 1700

April 2000
Page 12 of 12

D. MOUNTING BRACKETS, STANDS & WEATHER-PROOF HOUSING
TYPE
(note 3) Wall or Surface Bracket (Fireproofed Column)
Floor Stand Small or Medium Device
Floor Stand Large Device
Weather-Proof Housing (Body Case)
Weather-Proof Housing (Full Enclosure)
Weather-Proof Housing (Gauge)
Line Pipe Saddle Mount
HANDLE
1.2
1.2
2.2
1.2
2.2
1.2
1.2
INSTALL
5.4
4.6
4.6
2.0
8.0
1.0
4.0
TOTAL
6.6
5.8
6.8
3.2
10.2
3.2
5.2
BRACKET, STAND & HOUSING NOTES

1.
2.
Any additional supports required are not included.
3.
For Non-Fireproofed column, use 4.6 work hours for Install labor.
4.
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 1 of 10
PAINT & INSULATION UNIT WORK HOURS

A. PAINT
WHs PER SQUARE FOOT

SURFACE PREP
SP-6
SP-10 SP-5
PRIMER, INTERMEDIATE
& FINISH COATS (EACH)
1. STRUCTURAL STEEL
LIGHT (20# and below)
MEDIUM & HEAVY (over 20#)
0.0191 0.0221 0.0263

0.0159 0.0180 0.0206
0.0100
0.0067
2. PIPE & VESSELS

ALL
0.0142 0.0160 0.0183
0.0062
PAINT NOTES
1.
2.
All work hour units are based on yard work at grade prior to erection by spray application.
3.
For application by brush and/or roller instead of spray, add 60% to the above work hour units.
4.
For in-place work, add the following to the above work hour units:
Grade to 20'
Over 20' to 50'
Over 50' to 100'
Over 100'
5.
100%
120%
135%
150%
Explanation of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) specifications for Surface Preparation
(SP):
SP-6
Commercial Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning until at least two thirds of each

element of surface area is free of visible residue
(for high humidity chemical atmosphere, marine,
or other corrosive environment).
SP-10
Near White Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning nearly to white metal cleanliness

until at least 95 percent of each element of surface
area is free of all visible residues (for high
humidity chemical atmosphere where high cost of
cleaning is warranted).
SP-5
White Metal Blast Cleaning
Removal of all visible rust, mill scale, paint, and

foreign matter by blast cleaning by wheel or
mozzle (dry or wet) using sand, grit, or shot (for
very corrosive atmosphere where high cost of
cleaning is warranted).
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 2 of 10

A. PAINT cont.
PAINT NOTES cont.
6.
Painting structural steel can be estimated on a Per Ton basis only when the square feet per ton
can be determined. There are no averages that apply. For a comprehensive listing of square feet
per lineal foot for various structural shapes and sizes, see Richardson.
7.
The LIGHT structural steel category includes flange, channel, tee and angle shapes; ladders; cages;
plate; grating; and other miscellaneous steel items.
8.
Pipe diameter to square feet conversion (based on pipe O.D.):

Nominal Size
3 & below
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
42
48
9.
SQ. FT. per LF

use 1.00
1.18
1.74
2.26
2.82
3.34
3.67
4.19
4.72
5.24
6.29
7.86
9.43
11.00
12.57
Pipe equivalent linear footage (ELF) factors (note - when taking off linear feet (LF) of pipe,
measurement must be taken through all fittings, flanges, valves, instruments, specialty items and
any other in-line appurtenances):
Fittings, flanges and valves:
ITEM
Fittings
Flanges
Valves
LF/EA
0.2 times diameter
2.0
8.0
(Fittings limited to welded and screwed ells, tees, reducers and caps no pipe nipples,
plugs, olets, unions, etc.; Flanges limited to line and orifice no blinds or figure 8s;
Valves open to all types)
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 3 of 10

A. PAINT cont.
PAINT NOTES cont.
10. Vessel square footage calculation:
Shell: greatest circumference times straight length or height
Elliptical heads (noncircular most common is a 2:1 ratio): greatest diameter squared
(squaring provides coverage for the elliptical shape)
Hemispherical heads (circular): diameter squared times pi (3.1416), then divide by two
11. For removal of paint coatings, multiply the appropriate work hour unit above times 3.0. Disposal of
material generated during the removal process is not included.
12. Field painting is typically a subcontract item. These work hours can be used as an aid for
scheduling purposes.
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 4 of 10

B. INSULATION
3. PIPE
WHs PER LF
HOT
GLASS
FIBER
SINGLE LAYER
DOUBLE LAYER
THICKNESS
Pipe Size
2 & below
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
1
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.24
0.25
0.28
0.31
0.32
0.36
0.38
0.40
0.47
-----
2
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.35
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.50
0.87
1.04
3
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.37
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.47
0.53
1.15
1.42
MINERAL
WOOL
SINGLE LAYER
4
0.35
0.36
0.37
0.43
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.57
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.82
1.45
1.73
DOUBLE LAYER
THICKNESS
Pipe Size
2 & below
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
1
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.24
---------------------
2
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.35
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.48
0.92
1.09
5
0.37
0.40
0.43
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.58
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.76
0.95
1.61
1.89
3
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.37
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.47
0.50
1.22
1.50
4
0.35
0.36
0.37
0.43
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.57
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.77
1.53
1.82
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 5 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
3. PIPE cont.
WHs PER LF
HOT cont.
CALCIUM
SILICATE
SINGLE LAYER
DOUBLE LAYER
THICKNESS
Pipe Size
2 & below
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
1
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.24
---------------------
2
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.35
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.50
0.97
1.15
3
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.37
0.39
0.40
0.43
0.47
0.53
1.28
1.58
4
0.35
0.36
0.37
0.43
0.46
0.50
0.53
0.55
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.81
1.61
1.92
5
0.37
0.40
0.43
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.58
0.61
0.66
0.71
0.76
1.05
1.79
2.10
6
0.40
0.44
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.58
0.63
0.66
0.71
0.76
0.81
1.12
1.95
2.27
COLD
CELLULAR GLASS
OR
POLYURETHANE
SINGLE LAYER
Pipe Size
2 & below
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
1
0.31
0.31
0.35
0.42
0.52
0.60
0.68
0.73
0.85
0.94
1.02
1.21
1.52
1.81
2
0.31
0.40
0.42
0.52
0.60
0.68
0.80
0.85
0.94
1.02
1.11
1.28
1.63
1.90
DOUBLE LAYER
THICKNESS
3
4
5
6
0.40
0.57
0.66
0.73
0.47
0.66
0.75
0.81
0.52
0.72
0.80
0.85
0.60
0.80
0.93
1.00
0.65
0.93
1.03
1.18
0.80
1.03
1.12
1.20
0.88
1.12
1.21
1.37
0.94
1.16
1.31
1.43
1.02
1.31
1.40
1.48
1.11
1.40
1.48
1.57
1.21
1.48
1.59
1.71
1.38
1.73
1.83
1.92
1.72
2.02
2.11
2.19
1.99
2.29
2.38
2.45
7
0.77
0.86
0.95
1.13
1.22
1.30
1.46
1.48
1.55
1.68
1.83
1.98
2.28
2.53
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 6 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
4. EQUIPMENT
WHs PER SQUARE FOOT
HOT
GLASS
FIBER
VERTICAL
Thickness
1 SL
2 SL
3 SL
4 DL
5 DL
6 DL
Shell
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.26
0.28
0.30
Exposed
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.42
0.48
0.54
0.78
0.84
0.90
Concealed
Heads
with
Insulation
Cement
0.28
0.32
0.36
0.52
0.56
0.60
HORIZONTAL
Irregular
Surfaces
w/ Fabric
& Mastic
0.56
0.64
0.72
1.04
1.12
1.20
Shell
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.29
0.31
0.33
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.45
0.54
0.60
0.87
0.93
0.99
MINERAL
WOOL
VERTICAL
Thickness
2 SL
3 SL
4 DL
5 DL
6 DL
Shell
0.17
0.19
0.27
0.29
0.32
Exposed
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.51
0.57
0.81
0.87
0.96
Concealed
Heads
with
Insulation
Cement
0.34
0.38
0.54
0.58
0.64
HORIZONTAL
Irregular
Surfaces
w/ Fabric
& Mastic
0.68
0.76
1.08
1.16
1.28
*SL = Single Layer

*DL = Double Layer
*Irregular Surfaces include Pumps, Turbines, Compressors, etc.
Shell
0.20
0.22
0.32
0.34
0.35
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.50
0.55
0.80
0.85
0.88
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 7 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
4. EQUIPMENT cont.
WHs PER SQUARE FOOT
HOT cont.
CALCIUM
SILICATE
VERTICAL
Thickness
2 SL
3 SL
4 DL
5 DL
6 DL
Shell
0.20
0.21
0.26
0.27
0.29
Exposed
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.50
0.53
0.65
0.68
0.73
Concealed
Heads
with
Insulation
Cement
0.40
0.42
0.52
0.54
0.58
HORIZONTAL
Irregular
Surfaces
w/ Fabric
& Mastic
0.80
0.84
1.04
1.08
1.16
Shell
0.24
0.26
0.40
0.42
0.45
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.72
0.78
1.20
1.26
1.35
COLD
CELLULAR GLASS
OR
POLYURETHANE
VERTICAL
Thickness
1 SL
2 SL
3 DL
4 DL
5 DL
6 DL
7 DL
Shell
0.32
0.35
0.53
0.56
0.61
0.63
0.66
Exposed
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.96
1.05
1.59
1.68
1.83
1.89
1.98
Concealed
Heads
with
Insulation
Cement
0.64
0.70
1.06
1.12
1.22
1.26
1.32
HORIZONTAL
Irregular
Surfaces
w/ Fabric
& Mastic
1.28
1.40
2.12
2.24
2.44
2.52
2.64
Shell
0.34
0.37
0.56
0.59
0.64
0.66
0.70
Heads
with
Metal
Jacket
0.85
0.93
1.40
1.48
1.60
1.65
1.75
*SL = Single Layer

*DL = Double Layer
*Irregular Surfaces include Pumps, Turbines, Compressors, etc.
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 8 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
INSULATION NOTES
1.
2.
All work hour units are based on in-place work from Grade to 20'. For elevated work, add the
following to the above work hour units:
Over 20' to 50'
Over 50' to 100'
Over 100'
20%
35%
50%
3.
Applications below minus 150 degrees F are termed cryogenic; those above 1500 degrees F are
termed refractory; these categories are not included in these work hour units.
4.
The use of insulation materials to absorb noise emitted from piping and equipment is classified as
noise abatement; this application is not included in these work hour units.
5.
Insulation thickness for all materials are available in increments. The use of whole sizes for
HOT and half sizes for COLD was done intentionally to emphasize the differences between their
respective applications. For any thickness required that is not listed, simply use the midpoint
between the lower and higher thickness columns.
6.
For all types of HOT Pipe insulation (Glass Fiber, Mineral Wool and Calcium Silicate), the work
hour units are based on the following erection method:
Pipe cover is secured with 16-gage wire on 9-inch centers. Weatherproof jacket with moisture
barrier is secured with wide by 0.015 inch thick SS bands and seals on 9-inch centers.
7.
For all types of COLD Pipe insulation (Cellular Glass and Polyurethane), the work hour units are
based on the following erection method:
Joints are buttered with joint sealer. Pipe cover is secured with fiberglass tape on piping 4
inches OD (Outside Diameter) and smaller spaced on 9-inch centers. On piping above 4 inches
OD, use wide by 0.015 inch thick SS bands and seals spaced on 9-inch centers. Vapor
barrier mastic (3/16 Total Wet Film) reinforced with polyester fabric. Weatherproof jacket
with moisture barrier is secured with wide by 0.015 inch thick SS bands and seals on 9inch centers.
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 9 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
INSULATION NOTES cont.
8.
For all types of HOT Equipment insulation (Glass Fiber, Mineral Wool and Calcium Silicate), the
work hour units are based on the following erection method:
Shell cover (blanket or block) is applied with staggered joint arrangement. Top and bottom
edges are securely tied over support rings with wire on 12-inch centers. Vertical and horizontal
seams are laced together by interlocking the wire mesh and with wire ties where necessary.
The insulation is secured in place with bands spaced on 12-inch centers.
Head cover is shaped so that all sections closely fit the contour of the head and are laced
together with wire, or are secured with bands on 12-inch centers at tangent line. Exposed head
cover is secured with bands attached to a round steel rod, with a floating ring on the top
and a circumferential band at the tangent line of the vessel head. Unexposed head cover is
secured with wire to insulation supports provided by the vessel manufacturer.
Weatherproof jacket on vertical equipment is supported on S-clips spaced on 4-foot centers.
The jacketing for vertical and horizontal equipment is secured with bands spaced on 12-inch
centers with one band at each circumferential lap. On vertical equipment, band loops are
included on each band to prevent vertical movement. Weatherproof jacket on exposed vessel
heads is a flat metal sheet cut into pie pieces and secured with screws on 3-inch centers.
9.
For all types of COLD Equipment insulation (Cellular Glass and Polyurethane), the work hour
units are based on the following erection method:
Shell cover (block) is applied with staggered joint arrangement. Joints are buttered with joint
sealer. In double layer applications, the inner layer is applied without joint sealer. Each layer is
secured with bands on 12-inch centers. Outer layer joints are offset from inner layer joints.
Vapor barrier is outer layer only. Joints are sealed with a foil-to-mylar 3-inch wide strip
applied over the vapor barrier. Contraction joints are included as 1 wide, packed with 2 of
fiberglass blanket material, on 12-foot maximum centers.
Head cover is shaped so that all sections closely fit the contour of the head. Joints are buttered
with joint sealer. In double layer applications, the inner layer is applied without joint sealer. .
Exposed head cover is secured with bands attached to a round steel rod, with a floating ring
on the top and a circumferential band at the tangent line of the vessel head. Unexposed head
cover is secured with wire to insulation supports provided by the vessel manufacturer.
Weatherproof jacket on vertical equipment is supported on S-clips spaced on 4-foot centers.
The jacketing for vertical and horizontal equipment is secured with bands spaced on 12-inch
centers with one band at each circumferential lap. Each band is equipped with one breather
spring.
000 310 1800

April 2000
Page 10 of 10

B. INSULATION cont.
INSULATION NOTES cont.
10. Pipe equivalent linear footage (ELF) factors (note - when taking off linear feet (LF) of pipe,
measurement must be taken through all fittings, flanges, valves, instruments, specialty items and
any other in-line appurtenances):
Fittings, flanges (per pair) and non-flanged valves:
Nominal size
1 & below
1 thru 6
Above 6
LF/EA
2.0
3.0
0.5 times nominal size
(Fittings limited to welded and screwed ells, tees, reducers and caps no pipe nipples,
plugs, olets, unions, etc.; Flanges limited to line and orifice no blinds or figure 8s;
Valves open to all types)
Flanged valves and flanged fittings: one fitting plus one pair of flanges
Pipe bends: 3 times the length of the bend
11. Vessel square footage calculation:
Shell: greatest circumference (including insulation thickness on both sides) times straight
length or height, plus one foot at each end.
Elliptical heads (noncircular most common is a 2:1 ratio): greatest diameter (including
insulation thickness on both sides) squared
(squaring provides coverage for the elliptical shape)
Hemispherical heads (circular): diameter (including insulation thickness on both sides) squared
times pi (3.1416), then divide by two
12. For removal of insulation, multiply the appropriate work hour unit above times 0.3. Disposal of
material generated during the removal process is not included.
13. Field insulation is typically a subcontract item. These work hours can be used as an aid for
scheduling purposes.
000 310 2000

April 2000
Page 1 of 3
DEMOLITION UNIT WORK HOURS

CAUTION! - This section should be used as a general guideline when developing work hours for a
demolition scope of work. Typically, it is more accurate to develop demolition hours from a crew
basis methodology, due to the potential volume fluctuations in any given category. Thus, the use of
the units below could over- or under-exaggerate the true effort required. Also, the categories below
represent only those areas in which there has been sufficient Fluor Daniel history to support their
inclusion in this manual. For any activities not listed below, consult the appropriate erection work
hour section for use as a guideline as well as consulting the appropriate construction department
personnel.
WHs
UNIT
Bituminous Pavement, 3 thick

Bituminous Pavement, 4 to 6 thick
0.07
0.11
SY
SY
Chain Link Fence and Gates
0.14
LF
0.05
SQ.FT.
0.07
SQ.FT.
Masonry (minimum reinforcing)
0.32
CU.FT.
Steel Frame
Light
Medium
Heavy
17.0
14.0
12.0
TON
TON
TON
Metal/Wood studs, drywall 2 sides
0.05
SQ.FT.
Wood Framing, Joists (total ceiling area)
0.025
SQ.FT.
Roofing built up with gravel

Roofing built up without gravel
Roofing Metal
0.05
0.03
0.025
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
Metal Decking
0.02
SQ.FT.
Metal Siding
Metal Siding New Penetrations
0.023
0.15
SQ.FT.
SQ.FT.
Drywall (one side only)
0.02
SQ.FT.
DESCRIPTION
A. GENERAL SITEWORK
B. BUILDINGS
Dust Partition, 6 mil. Poly, 2 X 4 Frame
(Erect and dismantle)
Dust Partition, 5/8 plywood, 2 X 4 Frame
(Erect and dismantle)
000 310 2000

April 2000
Page 2 of 3

DESCRIPTION
WHs
UNIT
Concrete Slab on Grade (by machine)
5.0
CY
Small Equipment Foundations (by jackhammer)
25.0
CY
Equipment Foundations in Existing Facilities

(by jackhammer)
25.0
CY
Foundations Accessible by Major Equipment
10.0
CY
Haul and Dispose Onsite (within 1 mile radius)
0.25
CY
Sawcutting
4 thick
6 thick
8 thick
0.15
0.20
0.25
LF
LF
LF
C. CONCRETE
000 310 2000

April 2000
Page 3 of 3

D. PIPING
IN-PLACE PIPE CUTS
Pipe
Size
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
WHs EACH
STD
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.34
0.43
0.60
0.76
0.92
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.3
2.6
XS
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.42
0.52
0.73
0.92
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.2
S/10
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.3
2.6
S/20
0.76
0.92
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.7
3.2
S/30
0.76
0.92
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.2
S/40
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.34
0.43
0.60
0.76
0.92
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.7
3.2
S/60
0.92
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.6
*1.8
*1.9
*2.3
S/80
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.42
0.52
0.73
0.92
1.1
1.3
*1.4
*1.6
*1.8
*1.9
*2.3
S/100
S/120
S/140
1.8
2.2
*2.6
*2.8
*3.2
*3.5
*3.9
*4.5
1.0
1.5
1.8
*2.2
*2.6
*2.8
*3.2
*3.5
*3.9
*4.5
*1.8
*2.2
*2.6
*2.8
*3.2
*3.5
*3.9
*4.5
S/160
0.25
0.29
0.36
0.49
0.60
0.84
1.0
1.5
*1.8
*2.2
*2.6
*2.8
*3.2
*3.5
*3.9
*4.5
XXS
0.25
0.29
0.36
0.49
0.60
0.84
1.0
*1.5
*1.8
*2.2
*2.6
PIPING DEMOLITION NOTES

1.
Work hour units include flame cutting of pipe only.
2.
* Indicates wall thickness equal to or greater than thick (0.750).
3.
For handling of demolished pipe, see Piping Unit Work Hour's section, Handling Notes.
4.
For unbolting of demolished pipe, see Piping Unit Work Hour's section, Bolt-up Notes.
000 310 3000

April 2000
Page 1 of 3
TYPICAL COMPOSITE CREW MIXES

Crew Make Up
# Per Crew
Typical Work Activities
0.33
1.00
3.00
6.00
4.00
14.33
Load, Haul and Dump

Excavation
Trenching
Bedding
Backfill
Compaction
Finish Grading
Site Finish
0.33
1.00
3.00
1.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.50
0.25
3.00
15.08
Formwork
Rebar
Wiremesh
Embedded Items
Place and Finish
0.33
1.00
6.00
2.00
2.00
0.50
1.00
12.83
Structural Steel
00 EARTHWORK CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Operator
Truck Driver
Labor/Utility Man
10 CONCRETE CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Carpenter
Carpenter Apprentice
Ironworker
Ironworker Apprentice
Cement Finisher
Operator
Truck Driver
Labor/Utilityman
20 STRUCTURAL STEEL CREWS

General Foreman
Foreman
Ironworker
Ironworker Apprentice
Operator
Truck Driver
Labor/Utilityman
000 310 3000

April 2000
Page 2 of 3
TYPICAL COMPOSITE CREW MIXES cont.

Crew Make Up
# Per Crew
30 ARCHITECTURAL/HVAC CREWS
None provided this account is typically sub-contracted.
If required, see Means, Richardson or other recognized estimating publications.
40 EQUIPMENT CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Pipefitter
Millwright
Millwright Apprentice
Boilermaker
Boilermaker Apprentice
Ironworker
Operator
Truck Driver
0.33
1.00
4.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
0.50
0.50
1.50
14.83
Equipment
General Foreman
Foreman
Pipefitter
Pipefitter Apprentice
Pipefitter Welder
Operator
Truck Driver
Labor/Utilityman
0.50
1.50
3.00
2.00
5.00
1.50
0.50
1.00
15.00
Piping
0.33
1.00
6.00
3.00
0.50
1.00
11.83
Electrical Bulks and Equipment
50 PIPING CREWS
60 ELECTRICAL CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Electrician
Electrician Apprentice
Truck Driver
Labor/Utilityman
000 310 3000

April 2000
Page 3 of 3
TYPICAL COMPOSITE CREW MIXES cont.

Crew Make Up
# Per Crew
0.33
1.00
5.00
1.00
0.25
7.58
Instrumentation
0.33
1.00
8.00
4.00
13.33
Painting
0.33
1.00
5.00
5.00
11.33
Insulation
70 CONTROL SYSTEMS CREWS

General Foreman
Foreman
Instrument Fitter
Instrument Fitter Apprentice
Truck Driver
81 PAINTING CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Painter
Painter Apprentice
82 INSULATION CREWS
General Foreman
Foreman
Insulator
Insulator Apprentice
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 1 of 12

The intent of this section is to provide the estimator with generic guidelines for the final phases of the
construction work under a contract. It covers mechanical completion, turnover, commissioning,
startup, performance testing and final acceptance.
I. OVERVIEW
SCOPE
There is a typical breakdown of the division of responsibilities between Fluor and the Client for
operations during these final phases of the construction work. This section does not contain all items
required to perform field checkout, and is not intended for such use. Where Fluor is the Managing
Contractor, a further breakdown may be needed. Requirements in these final phases vary widely from
contract to contract and specific contractual provisions have precedence over material herein. The
Project Manager and the Construction Manager must be familiar with the requirements in their
particular contract related to these final phases and plan and prepare for their execution well in advance
of the completion of construction. The Proposal Manager must see that the scope of work and the
estimate both cover these final phases of the work, when applicable, and are consistent with one
another.
DEFINITIONS
Mechanical Completion generally means that the facility (plant, unit, system of any part thereof) has
been erected in accordance with drawings, specifications, applicable codes and regulations, including
all tests and checks necessary to permit commencement of commission and startup operations by the
Client.
Turnover is the process of transferring principal responsibility of the plant, unit, or any part thereof,
from Fluor to the Client. This activity generally involves formal transfer of care, custody and control to
the Client.
Commissioning consists of activities associated with the operation of items of equipment or facilities in
preparation for plant startup and introduction of feed stock. These activities are the Clients
responsibility unless the contract specifically provides otherwise. Note that the word commissioning
in electrical contracts has a different context. It means all work necessary to energize the equipment,
normally performed by Fluor (or subcontractor) prior to turnover to the Client.
Startup commences when steps are taken to introduce feed stocks and bring the unit/plant to operating
pressure and temperature. It is complete when the unit/facility is operating at design capacity and
producing to specifications as determined by performance testing. Startup activities are the Clients
responsibility unless the contract specifically provides otherwise.
Performance Tests are limited periods of operation of a facility/unit to demonstrate that it will produce
product of the quality and quantity guaranteed by Fluor or a Licensor.
Final Acceptance is the documentation that the work under the contract has been completed and is
accepted by the Client.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 2 of 12

I. OVERVIEW cont.
MECHANICAL COMPLETION
Mechanical completion is generally declared at the stage of the work where the construction crew has
essentially completed the installation and a shift in primary emphasis and responsibility from Fluor
Daniel to the Client is desired and agreed upon by the parties. Incomplete work and deficiencies, if any,
will be identified with the declaration of mechanical completion. Any completed unit or definable
entity may be agreed to be mechanically complete independently of the status of the remainder of the
work. Prior to mechanical completion any commissioning/startup activities must be subordinated to the
work of construction. After mechanical completion, the commissioning/startup operations will have
priority over the construction work and the latter must necessarily be limited.
It is a requisite to mechanical completion that all equipment, piping, instrumentation and electrical
systems be installed. It is desirable that all specification required adjustments and tests for which the
construction crew is responsible be completed prior to declaring mechanical completion. For electrical
systems, all tests, relay setting and checkouts must be completed prior to energization. However, some
activities require that equipment be hot, energized, or actually running, so it is usual to retain a small
crew of millwrights, electricians and others to accomplish that work after mechanical completion under
the supervision of the Client during the commissioning or startup phase. Usually, mechanical
completion is agreed upon while there is still some insulation and painting to be done, the area must still
undergo final cleanup, scaffolding and temporary structures must be removed, and the construction
crew and equipment must be demobilized.
The mechanical checkout is conducted by the construction group and usually verified by members of
the Client team. It should include a review of reports of tests conducted by the construction group and
subcontractors such as pressure tests, electrical measurements, loop checks, and rotational direction
checks to assure that all items have been covered. Detailed inspection tours should be made to
determine that: features affected by flow direction (such as meters) are properly oriented; facilities for
by-passing, blocking and blinding are properly located; temporary blinds and other provisions required
only for testing have been removed; and any other mechanical condition which may delay or complicate
the startup has been properly accommodated. For some contracts, a licensor may be involved in
checkout.
Fluor Daniel process and instrumentation personnel conduct the final P&ID check sometimes with
members of the Client startup crew. It is a line-by-line, feature-by-feature check of the installation
against the mechanical flow sheets and thoroughness is essential to minimize commissioning and
startup difficulties and delays. It must be conducted prior to mechanical completion so the construction
crew may correct any discrepancies uncovered.
It is generally advantageous that mechanical completion be agreed upon as early as practical, but it is a
definite disadvantage to have any appreciable construction personnel finishing up construction work
during commissioning or startup operations. The Project and Construction Managers must consider
both factors before requesting or agreeing to a declaration of mechanical completion.
Notice of mechanical completion is usually formal notice to the Client that commissioning operations
can commence.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 3 of 12

I. OVERVIEW cont.
TURNOVER
Turnover is the sequence of events leading to transfer of principal responsibility for a unit or system
from the construction crew to a Client commissioning or startup crew. It is the demarcation between
the construction phase and commissioning/startup operations. Under many contracts, this is the point at
which transfer of care, custody and control is made to the Client. Transfer of care, custody and control
of work done by subcontractors must be done as specified in the subcontract terms.
Even when the commissioning/startup is done by Fluor personnel, there should be a formal transfer and
acceptance of responsibility at this point. Insurance coverage may be altered at this point and certain
payments may also be dependent thereon. The Project Manager must see that any such matters related
to this point of progress are properly administered.
COMMISSIONING
The commissioning phase of the work generally commences shortly before plant mechanical
completion and terminated prior to the introduction of feed stock. It may include final checkout and
cleanup, run-ins, charging of catalysts, flushing, purging, and energizing systems.
Crews for commissioning operations may consist entirely of Fluor personnel, entirely of Clients
personnel, or a mixture of the two. General responsibility for this phase of the work will be established
by the contract, but it is most important that the make-up of the crews for each activity be established
early and that responsibilities for specific functions be agreed upon and established.
Flushing of the process equipment and piping with oil (water or other liquids in Chemical plants), and
blowing out of air and steam lines to remove dirt, welding slag and other construction debris will reduce
startup difficulties. The run-in of mechanical equipment, whether conducted by Fluor or Client crews,
is an important prelude to startup. The manufacturers recommendations should be closely followed
and all possible adjustments of alarms, controls and auxiliary equipment should be made during the runins.
STARTUP
Startup commences when steps are taken to introduce feed stocks and to bring the system/unit/plant to
operating pressure and temperature. It is complete when the unit/plant is operating at design capacity
and producing to specifications as determined by performance testing. These operations are the
responsibility of and accomplished under the direction of the Client.
Thorough planning and preparation are essential to a successful startup. Preparations should include a
review of prior documentation to insure that mechanical and flowsheet checkout occurred prior to
mechanical completion, that the equipment and piping has been thoroughly flushed, and that the
commissioning phase is complete.
With thorough preparations having been made, the introduction of feed stocks, lighting-off of fires, and
initiation of circulation can proceed. The Operating Manuals of the process designer and of vendors
afford detailed instructions for each step of the startup, and the startup crew must become intimately
familiar with them well in advance and during dry-runs and run-ins. The startup should proceed in
orderly steps and with deliberate speed, with all feasible checking between each step.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 4 of 12

I. OVERVIEW cont.
PERFORMANCE TESTS
Performance test are usually run after the completion of startup operations and conducted by the
Clients production crew with Fluor and any involved Licensor being represented. Performance tests
may not be required under all contracts.
Performance tests, when required, are prerequisites to final acceptance, and often to final payments to
Fluor. Frequently, there is little or no incentive for the Client to expedite performance test runs and the
Project Manager must be diligent in his efforts to get them successfully completed.
It is necessary to take confirming data during the tests. Critical instruments should be calibrated
immediately prior to the test run. There should be prior agreement on what data will be determined and
reported, as well as the condition under which the test will be conducted. The methods of taking and
analyzing samples often prove critical to the success of a test run. The means of calculating and
evaluating results should also be agreed upon in advance.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Final Acceptance usually is initiated by a Project Manager prepared Notice of Completion letter to the
Client stating that Fluors work has been completed and requesting acceptance thereof.
Portions of the work may be subject to individual letters of acceptance if the Client wishes to take
control of them in advance of overall completion. A formal acceptance of the overall work should be
requested even if piece-meal acceptance of the many elements of work has been exercised. Fluor
acceptance of (sub) contractors work shall be as prescribed by the (sub) contract terms.
Final acceptance may be in order after mechanical completion, after initial operations, or only after
completion of performance testing. In any case the Project Manager must prepare the letter requesting
acceptance promptly when it is in order, and he must follow-up until the Clients acceptance is
received.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 5 of 12

II. CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL
Inspection and Testing
1)
2)
Inspect and check the work during the construction stage and perform such non-operational
tests as are necessary to assure the integrity of the installation in accordance with Drawings,
Specifications and vendors instructions.
Witness tests conducted in accordance with 1) above as required and signify acceptance upon
successful completion of each test.
Cleanup
1)
2)
Remove and dispose of all construction debris and leave all areas of the Work clean.
Remove all temporary supports, bracing, tiedown, rust preventatives, and like materials
provided for protection during the shipping, storage and installation phases.
Lubrication and Prime Charges

1)
2)
Perform initial lubrication of all moving parts in accordance with vendors instructions and
standard practices.
Make initial charge of non-production materials such as refrigerants, desiccants, transformer
oil, ion exchange resin and the like.
Vendors Representatives
1)
2)
For Fluor purchased equipment/material, arrange for, control, and reimburse vendor specialists
and representatives required to assure that the installations are made in accordance with design
and vendors instructions.
For Owner purchased equipment/material, arrange for, control, and reimburse vendor
specialists and representatives required to assure the installations are made in accordance with
design and vendors instructions.
Approvals and Certifications

1)
2)
Obtain any permits and approvals from governmental and regulatory agencies required to be in
the name of Contractor.
Obtain any permits and approvals from governmental and regulatory agencies required to be in
the name of the owner
BUILDINGS
1)
2)
Checkout electrical and mechanical equipment such as lighting, fans and air conditioners to
extent required to verify its operability.
Install furniture described on the drawings including laboratory benches and personnel lockers.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 6 of 12

II. CONSTRUCTION cont.
EQUIPMENT
Vessels/Tanks
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Install internals (including support screens) and, if specified, conduct tray leakage or other
tests to check integrity of field installed internals.
Pressure test, clean, and dry out after test.
Supply and install all packing for towers and drums including inert material as well as packing
rings and balls.
Dry out, cure, or otherwise treat as required by specification linings of drums, towers and tanks
when such treatment is prerequisite to further work required for mechanical completion.
Clean towers, drums and tanks, which have been opened and make final closures.
Inspect internals, witness tests and signify acceptance and authorization for final closure or
waiver of closure (by Client).
Exchangers
1)
2)
3)
Apply pressure tests, (if required), clean, dry, and close after tests.
Check fans of air coolers for direction of rotation, proper clearance and specified blade pitch
and establish that vibration is within specified limits. Check for header movement clearance
and removal of shipping clips.
Clean cooling tower basin, install screens in suction pit, check rotation of fans and pumps, and
wet down tower if excessive drying-out of wooden parts is likely.
Fired Heaters and Boilers

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Hydrotest all heaters and boilers which have not been shop tested.
Dry out, cure, or otherwise treat as specified any liners where damage may occur if action is
deferred or where such action is requisite to other work, which must be completed before
mechanical completion.
Perform functions set forth in item 2, above, when they can be deferred to the commissioning
phase of the work (by Client).
Blow fuel lines and connect burner piping after check for cleanliness.
Check registers and dampers for ease of operation and positioning of indicators.
Compressors and Generators

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
After the machines and their drivers have been assembled and installed in accordance with the
vendors instructions, bar-over or otherwise mechanically rotate each machine as required
for cold alignment and determine that it is free to rotate.
Check for and eliminate any loads imposed on the machine or piping or other connections.
Provide the specified oil for charging the lube and seal oil systems (by Client).
Flush lube and seal oil systems and replace dirty oil with new oil.
Set, checkout, and adjust the alarm and shutdown systems to the extent possible without power
application.
Adjust tension of all springs and all compression washers on compressor discharge bottles and
all compressor piping per drawings and specifications.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 7 of 12

EQUIPMENT cont.
Pumps
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Rotate pumps by hand to ascertain that they turn freely.

After pumps and drivers have been set and grouted, align and connect the couplings.
Install any packing or mechanical seals not installed by the vendor, using temporary packing
where it can be expected that flushing operations would damage the permanent material.
Replace temporary packing with permanent packing and replace mechanical seals damaged
during flushing operations.
Check for and eliminate any loads imposed on the pumps by connections thereto when in the
cold condition. When elimination of vertical loading is not practical because of support
location, check horizontal loads only.
Material Handling and Other Process Equipment

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Install all components of equipment and auxiliary parts furnished by vendors.

Rotate under no-load conditions, equipment such as filters and rotary mixers to determine
operability.
Check direction of rotation of all rotating equipment.
Level and calibrate weight scales and weigh hoppers and set tare weight when applicable (tare
is the weight of a container deducted from the total weight of the contents or load).
Under no-load conditions, perform running alignment of bag splitters, sewing machines and
like packaging equipment and synchronize with conveying equipment.
Fire, Safety, and Miscellaneous Equipment

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Test delivery of any new water wells drilled and flush wells when required (by Client).
Install any temporary piping required for the operation of new water wells.
Test and adjust, when necessary, all safety devices.
Test gas fire extinguisher system (C02 or Halon) and replace discharged cylinders with full
cylinders. Test and recharge dry-type extinguisher systems.
Furnish full cylinders of fire extinguisher gas (by Client).
Prior to equipment testing, remove all safety devices such as rupture discs and safety valves,
and replace after testing.
Install hose carts, portable extinguishers, hose stretchers, first aid kits, and similar fire and
safety equipment that is Contractor furnished.
Inspect expansion joints, snubbers and spring or Teflon mounted equipment for proper
alignment.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 8 of 12

PIPING
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
Pressure test all piping not open to atmosphere, using water or other liquid, air or other gas, or
the material conveyed in the line, as required by the pressure testing specification. Provide
temporary supports and block spring hangers if required, and remove after hydrotesting.
Witness pressure testing and issue acceptance statement covering piping tested.
Adjust pipe hangers and guides to provide for slope, anchoring, free movement or cold
springing as required in the specifications and drawings.
Prior to testing, remove any control valves, orifice plates, and like items that might be
damaged in testing and reinstall after testing is completed as required by the specifications.
Install line vents and drains, temporary strainers, spectacle blinds, temporary blinds, and startup bypasses in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
Remove blanks and install spectacle blinds to required position after pressure testing.
Provide purging material and purge lines in preparation for welding.
Make all piping tie-ins within the work area except those requiring hot taps. Obtain work
permit if required.
Make all piping tie-ins outside the work area and tie-ins anywhere requiring hot tap.
Test all welds and fittings of hot tap tie-ins in accordance with the pressure testing
specification.
Adjust pipe spring hangers to indicated cold load settings after pressure tests and removal of
shipping restraints. Record settings.
Install correct permanent packing and lubricant in valves and operators.
Check location and position of pipe guides, anchors and directional anchors.
Conduct chemical/mechanical cleaning operations as required by drawings/specifications
where such operations can be done without using permanently installed equipment.
ELECTRICAL
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Perform a dc high potential test on installed power cable rated above 1 kV in accordance with
the specification covering electrical work.
Measure and record the insulation resistance of all power, control, and lighting circuits from
phase to phase and from each phase to ground.
Measure and record the insulation resistance between the primary and secondary windings and
between each winding and ground for each power transformer installed.
Measure and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each
switchgear bus (also, verify the torque of bus splices) and phase to ground insulation resistance
of associated control circuits.
Measure dielectric strength of insulating liquid in power transformers, circuit breakers, and
disconnect switches. Also, check the nitrogen pad and liquid levels.
Set and test fault pressure relays and transformer taps.
Set and test all adjustable relays and direct action trip devices in accordance with the design.
Close and trip each circuit breaker and check operation of lockout devices, if provided.
Check operation of automatic transfer provisions under simulated fault and under-voltage
conditions.
Check phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of all motor control buses.
Set and check all alarm, shutdown, timer and sequential operation systems for proper
operability, simulating actual operations where necessary.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 9 of 12

ELECTRICAL cont.
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
Measure insulation resistance of winding of all motors 5 HP or larger.

Dry out winding of transformers, generators and motors if insulation resistance tests indicate
need.
Momentarily energize all 3-phase motors to check direction of rotation.
Test all electrical alarms by simulating abnormal conditions.
Install lamps (incandescent bulbs, fluorescent tubes, etc.) required to fill the fixtures and verify
all lights burn and light switches operate properly. Test photocells for proper operation.
Conduct any tests required to determine illumination level.
Measure resistance to earth for each grounding system.
Check phase sequence and polarity and tag wiring in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
Check operating functions of any emergency and/or standby power system and battery
chargers including the uninterruptible power supply systems.
Uncouple motors to be run in, run per vendor or design requirements, and recouple upon
completion of that operation.
Install sealing compound in all seals.
Check operability of Contractor installed communications systems.
Record and report all tests conducted.
Energize and de-energize temporary facilities as required for above activities.
Witness such tests as required and promptly issue approvals upon successful conclusion
thereof.
CONTROL SYSTEMS
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
Check instruments supplied against specification (type, range, material, etc.).

Install instruments and make all specified connections.
Perform pressure tests on instrument air piping and tubing.
Blow-out instrument air piping and tubing with dry air before reconnecting after pressure tests.
Set instrument air pressure regulators.
Check entire instrumentation system for proper installation including tagging, supports,
accessibility, correct material and ratings of fittings. Synchronize transmitter and receiver
readings for each instrument.
Stroke control valves and adjust the valve movement and positioner action as required. Also
check for proper direction of movement upon air failure and proper flow direction through the
body.
Check instruments for proper electrical and mechanical operation.
Check instrument loops for continuity, completeness and identification, applying simulated
signals when practical (loop continuity checks should be performed back to the DCS).
Fill manometers, draft gauges and like instruments with the proper fluids.
Test annunciator and individual alarms by simulating alarm conditions or, when this is not
possible, by mechanically operating the contacts.
Test gas detectors, ionization detectors, and fire control panels.
Test and adjust as necessary, timers, switches, relays, pushbuttons, interlocks, and other
electrical adjuncts of the instrumentation.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 10 of 12

CONTROL SYSTEMS cont.
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
Check, test, and adjust when necessary, instruments and instrument systems furnished as part
of a vendors package supply.
Set and test relief valves.
Perform preliminary instrument calibrations (bench calibration typically prior to installation).
Record and report all test data accumulated during the above actions.
Witness tests and operations as desired and signify acceptance upon successful completion of
each test.
OTHER WORK
1)
Complete all necessary insulation, painting, paving, fencing, and items of like nature.
III. COMMISSIONING
GENERAL
1)
Schedule and issue permits for Fluor completion of any deferred insulation and paint touch up
noted in turnover documents.
VENDOR REPRESENTATIVES
1)
Arrange for, control and reimburse all vendors specialists required during the commissioning
and startup.
BUILDINGS
1)
2)
Conduct tests and adjusts air conditioner systems, ventilating systems and safety equipment.
Clean and commission toilets, basins, sewers, and water systems.
EQUIPMENT
Vessels
1)
Supply and install all catalysts and material such as balls on which the catalyst is deposited.

1)
Accomplish boilout, chemical cleaning and flushing as required.

1)
2)
3)
Clean and flush lube and seal oil systems and recharge with clean oil, if desired.
Provide the specified oil for flushing and recharging the lube and seal oil systems.
Run in on air or other specified gas and adjust alarm and shutdown systems.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 11 of 12

III. COMMISSIONING cont.
EQUIPMENT cont.
Pumps
1)
Run in the pumps using the specified run in fluids. Check for vibration, balancing as
necessary. Adjust governor, trips and other controls as required.
Material Process and Handling Equipment

1)
2)
Make such adjustments, under load conditions, as are required to assure running alignment.
Provide all water treatment chemicals except the initial charge of ion exchange resin and inert
bed material in the water treating plant.
Fire, Safety, and Miscellaneous Equipment

1)
2)
3)
Conduct capacity test of system for firewater load.

Clean and flush cooling tower basin and intake screens prior to start-up.
Fill water reservoirs and head towers and operate fire pumps to checkout fire fighting systems.
PIPING
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Remove any control valves, orifice plates and like items which might be damaged by the
flushing operations and replace after flushing is completed.
Install temporary blinds, strainers and connections required for flushing.
Clean lines, as required by specification or flow sheets, by blowing with air or steam, washing
with water, flushing with oil, or by chemical cleaning.
Remove temporary strainers and blinds after line flushing operations.
Conduct tightness test, when required, by pressurizing the system with steam or air just prior
to introduction of process production stock.
Adjust and commission cathodic protection systems per specification.
ELECTRICAL
1)
2)
3)
Perform final testing and setting of adjustable relays.

Energize and de-energize permanent electrical facilities.
Check spare circuit breakers for fit and interchangeability.
CONTROL SYSTEMS
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Perform all final instrument calibrations.

Pressurize and energize the transmitting and control signal system.
Install sealing material for instruments requiring fluid seals.
Supply calibration gases for analyzers.
Check zero and calibrate analyzers.
000 310 9000

April 2000
Page 12 of 12

IV. START-UP
GENERAL
Cleanup
1)
Cleanup the areas as required during startup.
Lubrication and Prime Charges

1)
2)
Do all lubrication during startup phase of work.

Charge systems with glycol, freon, triethanolamine, chromate, methanol and other operating
chemicals as required.
EQUIPMENT
Exchangers
1)
Check vibration of fans and air coolers when at operating temperature and correct if excessive.
Check and adjust belts.

1)
Purge, light off and put boilers and heaters in operation, including charging treated water to
boilers.

1)
2)
Uncouple rotating equipment to be hot aligned, perform alignment, and recouple.

Perform any doweling required after final alignment.
Pumps
1)
2)
Check the pumps and drivers for vibration, balancing as necessary after the pumps are at
operating temperature.
Perform any doweling required after final adjustments have been made.
PIPING
1)
2)
3)
4)
Turn plot limit and other isolating blinds before start-up, when such blinds have not been
turned previously.
Install car seals on block valves or any other valves where required.
Furnish purging media and purge all lines as required during start-up operations.
Adjust pipe hangers, holddowns, and guides to provide for slope, anchoring, or free movement
as required by the specification and drawings, when system is at operating temperature.

Estimating

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Estimating

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FLUOR

This manual is the property of

It shall be returned to the Aliso Viejo

The contents of this manual are confidential,

000 310 0001

000 310 0001

000 310 0005

000 310 0010

BASIS OF WORK HOUR UNITS

000 310 1000

000 310 1100

000 310 1200

000 310 1300

000 310 1400

000 310 1500

000 310 1600

000 310 1700

000 310 1800

PAINT & INSULATION

000 310 2000

000 310 3000

000 310 9000

FINAL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 0005

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 0010

BASIS OF WORK HOUR UNITS

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 1000

EARTHWORK UNIT WORK HOURS

Strip Topsoil 6 depth

Scarify and Compact to 6 deep

Cut and Fill (Maximum 500 foot travel/haul)

Construct Earthfill Dikes

In Plant Roads base course only

B. MASS AREA EXCAVATION

100% Machine Excavation (Medium soil common earth and loam)

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 1000

EARTHWORK UNIT WORK HOURS

100% Hand Excavation

100% Hand Trenching

100% Machine Backfill/Compaction

100% Hand Backfill/Compaction

Bedding (for pipe)

Finish Grading (for Process Areas includes 100% handwork around

Fine Grading (for Paving applies to In-plant roads

Site Finish gravel/stone 6 thick

Patch Asphalt (4 thick maximum)

Load, Haul and Dump excess excavation

C. INDIVIDUAL FOUNDATION EXCAVATION cont.

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 1000

EARTHWORK UNIT WORK HOURS

Light Soil (Sand)

Light Soil (Sand)

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 1100

CONCRETE UNIT WORK HOURS

PLACE & FINISH

A. FORMWORK/PLACE & FINISH

ESTIMATING STANDARD UNIT WORK HOURS MANUAL

000 310 1100